1 //===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
2 //
3 // Part of the LLVM Project, under the Apache License v2.0 with LLVM Exceptions.
4 // See https://llvm.org/LICENSE.txt for license information.
5 // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0 WITH LLVM-exception
6 //
7 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
8 //
9 // Peephole optimize the CFG.
10 //
11 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
12 
13 #include "llvm/ADT/APInt.h"
14 #include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h"
15 #include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
16 #include "llvm/ADT/MapVector.h"
17 #include "llvm/ADT/Optional.h"
18 #include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
19 #include "llvm/ADT/ScopeExit.h"
20 #include "llvm/ADT/Sequence.h"
21 #include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
22 #include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
23 #include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
24 #include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
25 #include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
26 #include "llvm/ADT/StringRef.h"
27 #include "llvm/Analysis/AssumptionCache.h"
28 #include "llvm/Analysis/CaptureTracking.h"
29 #include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
30 #include "llvm/Analysis/DomTreeUpdater.h"
31 #include "llvm/Analysis/GuardUtils.h"
32 #include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
33 #include "llvm/Analysis/MemorySSA.h"
34 #include "llvm/Analysis/MemorySSAUpdater.h"
35 #include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
36 #include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
37 #include "llvm/IR/Attributes.h"
38 #include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h"
39 #include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
40 #include "llvm/IR/Constant.h"
41 #include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
42 #include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
43 #include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
44 #include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
45 #include "llvm/IR/Function.h"
46 #include "llvm/IR/GlobalValue.h"
47 #include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
48 #include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
49 #include "llvm/IR/InstrTypes.h"
50 #include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h"
51 #include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
52 #include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
53 #include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
54 #include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
55 #include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
56 #include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
57 #include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
58 #include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
59 #include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
60 #include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
61 #include "llvm/IR/Use.h"
62 #include "llvm/IR/User.h"
63 #include "llvm/IR/Value.h"
64 #include "llvm/IR/ValueHandle.h"
65 #include "llvm/Support/BranchProbability.h"
66 #include "llvm/Support/Casting.h"
67 #include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
68 #include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
69 #include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h"
70 #include "llvm/Support/KnownBits.h"
71 #include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h"
72 #include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
73 #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
74 #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
75 #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
76 #include <algorithm>
77 #include <cassert>
78 #include <climits>
79 #include <cstddef>
80 #include <cstdint>
81 #include <iterator>
82 #include <map>
83 #include <set>
84 #include <tuple>
85 #include <utility>
86 #include <vector>
87 
88 using namespace llvm;
89 using namespace PatternMatch;
90 
91 #define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
92 
93 cl::opt<bool> llvm::RequireAndPreserveDomTree(
94     "simplifycfg-require-and-preserve-domtree", cl::Hidden,
95 
96     cl::desc("Temorary development switch used to gradually uplift SimplifyCFG "
97              "into preserving DomTree,"));
98 
99 // Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
100 // a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
101 // To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
102 // minimum reasonable default.
103 static cl::opt<unsigned> PHINodeFoldingThreshold(
104     "phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
105     cl::desc(
106         "Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
107 
108 static cl::opt<unsigned> TwoEntryPHINodeFoldingThreshold(
109     "two-entry-phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(4),
110     cl::desc("Control the maximal total instruction cost that we are willing "
111              "to speculatively execute to fold a 2-entry PHI node into a "
112              "select (default = 4)"));
113 
114 static cl::opt<bool>
115     HoistCommon("simplifycfg-hoist-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
116                 cl::desc("Hoist common instructions up to the parent block"));
117 
118 static cl::opt<bool>
119     SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
120                cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
121 
122 static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
123     "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
124     cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
125 
126 static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
127     "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
128     cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
129              "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
130              "predicated store"));
131 
132 static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
133     "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
134     cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
135              "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
136 
137 static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
138     "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
139     cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
140              "executed"));
141 
142 static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
143     "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
144     cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
145              "speculatively executed instructions"));
146 
147 static cl::opt<int>
148     MaxSmallBlockSize("simplifycfg-max-small-block-size", cl::Hidden,
149                       cl::init(10),
150                       cl::desc("Max size of a block which is still considered "
151                                "small enough to thread through"));
152 
153 // Two is chosen to allow one negation and a logical combine.
154 static cl::opt<unsigned>
155     BranchFoldThreshold("simplifycfg-branch-fold-threshold", cl::Hidden,
156                         cl::init(2),
157                         cl::desc("Maximum cost of combining conditions when "
158                                  "folding branches"));
159 
160 static cl::opt<unsigned> BranchFoldToCommonDestVectorMultiplier(
161     "simplifycfg-branch-fold-common-dest-vector-multiplier", cl::Hidden,
162     cl::init(2),
163     cl::desc("Multiplier to apply to threshold when determining whether or not "
164              "to fold branch to common destination when vector operations are "
165              "present"));
166 
167 static cl::opt<bool> EnableMergeCompatibleInvokes(
168     "simplifycfg-merge-compatible-invokes", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
169     cl::desc("Allow SimplifyCFG to merge invokes together when appropriate"));
170 
171 static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSwitchCasesPerResult(
172     "max-switch-cases-per-result", cl::Hidden, cl::init(16),
173     cl::desc("Limit cases to analyze when converting a switch to select"));
174 
175 STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
176 STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps,
177           "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
178 STATISTIC(NumLookupTables,
179           "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
180 STATISTIC(
181     NumLookupTablesHoles,
182     "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
183 STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
184 STATISTIC(NumFoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors,
185           "Number of value comparisons folded into predecessor basic blocks");
186 STATISTIC(NumFoldBranchToCommonDest,
187           "Number of branches folded into predecessor basic block");
188 STATISTIC(
189     NumHoistCommonCode,
190     "Number of common instruction 'blocks' hoisted up to the begin block");
191 STATISTIC(NumHoistCommonInstrs,
192           "Number of common instructions hoisted up to the begin block");
193 STATISTIC(NumSinkCommonCode,
194           "Number of common instruction 'blocks' sunk down to the end block");
195 STATISTIC(NumSinkCommonInstrs,
196           "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
197 STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
198 STATISTIC(NumInvokes,
199           "Number of invokes with empty resume blocks simplified into calls");
200 STATISTIC(NumInvokesMerged, "Number of invokes that were merged together");
201 STATISTIC(NumInvokeSetsFormed, "Number of invoke sets that were formed");
202 
203 namespace {
204 
205 // The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
206 // case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
207 // cases composing the case group.
208 using SwitchCaseResultVectorTy =
209     SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>;
210 
211 // The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
212 // and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
213 // switch for that PHI.
214 using SwitchCaseResultsTy = SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4>;
215 
216 /// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
217 struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
218   ConstantInt *Value;
219   BasicBlock *Dest;
220 
221   ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
222       : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
223 
224   bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
225     // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
226     return Value < RHS.Value;
227   }
228 
229   bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
230 };
231 
232 class SimplifyCFGOpt {
233   const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
234   DomTreeUpdater *DTU;
235   const DataLayout &DL;
236   ArrayRef<WeakVH> LoopHeaders;
237   const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options;
238   bool Resimplify;
239 
240   Value *isValueEqualityComparison(Instruction *TI);
241   BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
242       Instruction *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
243   bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(Instruction *TI,
244                                                      BasicBlock *Pred,
245                                                      IRBuilder<> &Builder);
246   bool PerformValueComparisonIntoPredecessorFolding(Instruction *TI, Value *&CV,
247                                                     Instruction *PTI,
248                                                     IRBuilder<> &Builder);
249   bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(Instruction *TI,
250                                            IRBuilder<> &Builder);
251 
252   bool simplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
253   bool simplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
254   bool simplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
255   bool simplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
256   bool simplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
257   bool simplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
258   bool simplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
259   bool simplifyBranch(BranchInst *Branch, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
260   bool simplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
261   bool simplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
262 
263   bool tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICmpInst *ICI,
264                                              IRBuilder<> &Builder);
265 
266   bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
267                              bool EqTermsOnly);
268   bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
269                               const TargetTransformInfo &TTI);
270   bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(Instruction *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
271                                   BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
272                                   uint32_t TrueWeight, uint32_t FalseWeight);
273   bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
274                                  const DataLayout &DL);
275   bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select);
276   bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI);
277   bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
278 
279 public:
280   SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, DomTreeUpdater *DTU,
281                  const DataLayout &DL, ArrayRef<WeakVH> LoopHeaders,
282                  const SimplifyCFGOptions &Opts)
283       : TTI(TTI), DTU(DTU), DL(DL), LoopHeaders(LoopHeaders), Options(Opts) {
284     assert((!DTU || !DTU->hasPostDomTree()) &&
285            "SimplifyCFG is not yet capable of maintaining validity of a "
286            "PostDomTree, so don't ask for it.");
287   }
288 
289   bool simplifyOnce(BasicBlock *BB);
290   bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
291 
292   // Helper to set Resimplify and return change indication.
293   bool requestResimplify() {
294     Resimplify = true;
295     return true;
296   }
297 };
298 
299 } // end anonymous namespace
300 
301 /// Return true if all the PHI nodes in the basic block \p BB
302 /// receive compatible (identical) incoming values when coming from
303 /// all of the predecessor blocks that are specified in \p IncomingBlocks.
304 ///
305 /// Note that if the values aren't exactly identical, but \p EquivalenceSet
306 /// is provided, and *both* of the values are present in the set,
307 /// then they are considered equal.
308 static bool IncomingValuesAreCompatible(
309     BasicBlock *BB, ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> IncomingBlocks,
310     SmallPtrSetImpl<Value *> *EquivalenceSet = nullptr) {
311   assert(IncomingBlocks.size() == 2 &&
312          "Only for a pair of incoming blocks at the time!");
313 
314   // FIXME: it is okay if one of the incoming values is an `undef` value,
315   //        iff the other incoming value is guaranteed to be a non-poison value.
316   // FIXME: it is okay if one of the incoming values is a `poison` value.
317   return all_of(BB->phis(), [IncomingBlocks, EquivalenceSet](PHINode &PN) {
318     Value *IV0 = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(IncomingBlocks[0]);
319     Value *IV1 = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(IncomingBlocks[1]);
320     if (IV0 == IV1)
321       return true;
322     if (EquivalenceSet && EquivalenceSet->contains(IV0) &&
323         EquivalenceSet->contains(IV1))
324       return true;
325     return false;
326   });
327 }
328 
329 /// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
330 /// terminator instructions together.
331 static bool
332 SafeToMergeTerminators(Instruction *SI1, Instruction *SI2,
333                        SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> *FailBlocks = nullptr) {
334   if (SI1 == SI2)
335     return false; // Can't merge with self!
336 
337   // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
338   // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
339   // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
340   BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
341   BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
342 
343   SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
344   bool Fail = false;
345   for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB)) {
346     if (!SI1Succs.count(Succ))
347       continue;
348     if (IncomingValuesAreCompatible(Succ, {SI1BB, SI2BB}))
349       continue;
350     Fail = true;
351     if (FailBlocks)
352       FailBlocks->insert(Succ);
353     else
354       break;
355   }
356 
357   return !Fail;
358 }
359 
360 /// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
361 /// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
362 /// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
363 /// of Succ.
364 static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
365                                   BasicBlock *ExistPred,
366                                   MemorySSAUpdater *MSSAU = nullptr) {
367   for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis())
368     PN.addIncoming(PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
369   if (MSSAU)
370     if (auto *MPhi = MSSAU->getMemorySSA()->getMemoryAccess(Succ))
371       MPhi->addIncoming(MPhi->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
372 }
373 
374 /// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
375 /// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
376 /// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
377 /// expensive.
378 static InstructionCost computeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
379                                               const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
380   assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
381          "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
382   return TTI.getUserCost(I, TargetTransformInfo::TCK_SizeAndLatency);
383 }
384 
385 /// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
386 /// return true if the specified value dominates the block.  We
387 /// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
388 /// which works well enough for us.
389 ///
390 /// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
391 /// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
392 /// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than Budget and
393 /// are non-trapping.  If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
394 /// set and true is returned.
395 ///
396 /// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
397 /// Select whose cost is 2.
398 ///
399 /// After this function returns, Cost is increased by the cost of
400 /// V plus its non-dominating operands.  If that cost is greater than
401 /// Budget, false is returned and Cost is undefined.
402 static bool dominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
403                                 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> &AggressiveInsts,
404                                 InstructionCost &Cost,
405                                 InstructionCost Budget,
406                                 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
407                                 unsigned Depth = 0) {
408   // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
409   // so limit the recursion depth.
410   // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
411   // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
412   if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
413     return false;
414 
415   Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
416   if (!I) {
417     // Non-instructions dominate all instructions and can be executed
418     // unconditionally.
419     return true;
420   }
421   BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
422 
423   // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
424   // the bottom of this block.
425   if (PBB == BB)
426     return false;
427 
428   // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
429   // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
430   // statement".  If not, it definitely dominates the region.
431   BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
432   if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
433     return true;
434 
435   // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
436   if (AggressiveInsts.count(I))
437     return true;
438 
439   // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition".  Check to
440   // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
441   // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition.  If so, hoist it out.
442   if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
443     return false;
444 
445   Cost += computeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
446 
447   // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
448   // (as long as it is safe to do so).
449   // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
450   // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
451   // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
452   // enabled further IR optimizations.
453   if (Cost > Budget &&
454       (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts.empty() || Depth > 0 ||
455        !Cost.isValid()))
456     return false;
457 
458   // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
459   // not take us over the cost threshold.
460   for (Use &Op : I->operands())
461     if (!dominatesMergePoint(Op, BB, AggressiveInsts, Cost, Budget, TTI,
462                              Depth + 1))
463       return false;
464   // Okay, it's safe to do this!  Remember this instruction.
465   AggressiveInsts.insert(I);
466   return true;
467 }
468 
469 /// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
470 /// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
471 static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
472   // Normal constant int.
473   ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
474   if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
475     return CI;
476 
477   // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
478   // ConstantInt if possible.
479   IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
480 
481   // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
482   if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
483     return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
484 
485   // IntToPtr const int.
486   if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
487     if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
488       if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
489         // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
490         if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
491           return CI;
492         else
493           return cast<ConstantInt>(
494               ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
495       }
496   return nullptr;
497 }
498 
499 namespace {
500 
501 /// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
502 /// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
503 /// structure.
504 /// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
505 /// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
506 /// representing the different cases for the switch.
507 /// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
508 /// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
509 /// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
510 /// fail.
511 struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
512   const DataLayout &DL;
513 
514   /// Value found for the switch comparison
515   Value *CompValue = nullptr;
516 
517   /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
518   Value *Extra = nullptr;
519 
520   /// Set of integers to match in switch
521   SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals;
522 
523   /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
524   unsigned UsedICmps = 0;
525 
526   /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
527   ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL) : DL(DL) {
528     gather(Cond);
529   }
530 
531   ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
532   ConstantComparesGatherer &
533   operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
534 
535 private:
536   /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
537   /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
538   bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
539     if (CompValue && CompValue != NewVal)
540       return false;
541     CompValue = NewVal;
542     return (CompValue != nullptr);
543   }
544 
545   /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
546   /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
547   /// match depending on isEQ).
548   /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
549   /// against is placed in CompValue.
550   /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
551   /// is found but the value compared to is different.
552   bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
553     // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
554     ICmpInst *ICI;
555     ConstantInt *C;
556     if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
557           (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
558       return false;
559     }
560 
561     Value *RHSVal;
562     const APInt *RHSC;
563 
564     // Pattern match a special case
565     // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
566     // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
567     if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ : ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
568       // It's a little bit hard to see why the following transformations are
569       // correct. Here is a CVC3 program to verify them for 64-bit values:
570 
571       /*
572          ONE  : BITVECTOR(64) = BVZEROEXTEND(0bin1, 63);
573          x    : BITVECTOR(64);
574          y    : BITVECTOR(64);
575          z    : BITVECTOR(64);
576          mask : BITVECTOR(64) = BVSHL(ONE, z);
577          QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
578                 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y |  mask)))
579          );
580          QUERY( (y |  mask = y) =>
581                 ((x |  mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
582          );
583       */
584 
585       // Please note that each pattern must be a dual implication (<--> or
586       // iff). One directional implication can create spurious matches. If the
587       // implication is only one-way, an unsatisfiable condition on the left
588       // side can imply a satisfiable condition on the right side. Dual
589       // implication ensures that satisfiable conditions are transformed to
590       // other satisfiable conditions and unsatisfiable conditions are
591       // transformed to other unsatisfiable conditions.
592 
593       // Here is a concrete example of a unsatisfiable condition on the left
594       // implying a satisfiable condition on the right:
595       //
596       // mask = (1 << z)
597       // (x & ~mask) == y  --> (x == y || x == (y | mask))
598       //
599       // Substituting y = 3, z = 0 yields:
600       // (x & -2) == 3 --> (x == 3 || x == 2)
601 
602       // Pattern match a special case:
603       /*
604         QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
605                ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y |  mask)))
606         );
607       */
608       if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
609                 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
610         APInt Mask = ~*RHSC;
611         if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() & ~Mask) == C->getValue()) {
612           // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
613           if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
614             return false;
615 
616           Vals.push_back(C);
617           Vals.push_back(
618               ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
619                                C->getValue() | Mask));
620           UsedICmps++;
621           return true;
622         }
623       }
624 
625       // Pattern match a special case:
626       /*
627         QUERY( (y |  mask = y) =>
628                ((x |  mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
629         );
630       */
631       if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
632                 m_Or(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
633         APInt Mask = *RHSC;
634         if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() | Mask) == C->getValue()) {
635           // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
636           if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
637             return false;
638 
639           Vals.push_back(C);
640           Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
641                                           C->getValue() & ~Mask));
642           UsedICmps++;
643           return true;
644         }
645       }
646 
647       // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
648       if (!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
649         return false;
650 
651       UsedICmps++;
652       Vals.push_back(C);
653       return ICI->getOperand(0);
654     }
655 
656     // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
657     ConstantRange Span =
658         ConstantRange::makeExactICmpRegion(ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
659 
660     // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
661     // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
662     Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
663     if (match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
664       Span = Span.subtract(*RHSC);
665       CandidateVal = RHSVal;
666     }
667 
668     // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
669     // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
670     // x != 0 && x != 1.
671     if (!isEQ)
672       Span = Span.inverse();
673 
674     // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
675     if (Span.isSizeLargerThan(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
676       return false;
677     }
678 
679     // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
680     if (!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
681       return false;
682 
683     // Add all values from the range to the set
684     for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
685       Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
686 
687     UsedICmps++;
688     return true;
689   }
690 
691   /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
692   /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
693   /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
694   /// vector.
695   /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
696   void gather(Value *V) {
697     bool isEQ = match(V, m_LogicalOr(m_Value(), m_Value()));
698 
699     // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
700     SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
701     SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
702 
703     // Initialize
704     Visited.insert(V);
705     DFT.push_back(V);
706 
707     while (!DFT.empty()) {
708       V = DFT.pop_back_val();
709 
710       if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
711         // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
712         Value *Op0, *Op1;
713         if (isEQ ? match(I, m_LogicalOr(m_Value(Op0), m_Value(Op1)))
714                  : match(I, m_LogicalAnd(m_Value(Op0), m_Value(Op1)))) {
715           if (Visited.insert(Op1).second)
716             DFT.push_back(Op1);
717           if (Visited.insert(Op0).second)
718             DFT.push_back(Op0);
719 
720           continue;
721         }
722 
723         // Try to match the current instruction
724         if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
725           // Match succeed, continue the loop
726           continue;
727       }
728 
729       // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
730       // comparison against the same value as the others.
731       // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
732       if (!Extra) {
733         Extra = V;
734         continue;
735       }
736       // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
737       CompValue = nullptr;
738       break;
739     }
740   }
741 };
742 
743 } // end anonymous namespace
744 
745 static void EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(Instruction *TI,
746                                       MemorySSAUpdater *MSSAU = nullptr) {
747   Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
748   if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
749     Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
750   } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
751     if (BI->isConditional())
752       Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
753   } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
754     Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
755   }
756 
757   TI->eraseFromParent();
758   if (Cond)
759     RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond, nullptr, MSSAU);
760 }
761 
762 /// Return true if the specified terminator checks
763 /// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
764 Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(Instruction *TI) {
765   Value *CV = nullptr;
766   if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
767     // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
768     // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
769     if (!SI->getParent()->hasNPredecessorsOrMore(128 / SI->getNumSuccessors()))
770       CV = SI->getCondition();
771   } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
772     if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
773       if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
774         if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
775           CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
776       }
777 
778   // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
779   if (CV) {
780     if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
781       Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
782       if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
783         CV = Ptr;
784     }
785   }
786   return CV;
787 }
788 
789 /// Given a value comparison instruction,
790 /// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
791 BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
792     Instruction *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
793   if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
794     Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
795     for (auto Case : SI->cases())
796       Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(Case.getCaseValue(),
797                                                   Case.getCaseSuccessor()));
798     return SI->getDefaultDest();
799   }
800 
801   BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
802   ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
803   BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
804   Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(
805       GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL), Succ));
806   return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
807 }
808 
809 /// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
810 /// in the list that match the specified block.
811 static void
812 EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
813                     std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
814   llvm::erase_value(Cases, BB);
815 }
816 
817 /// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
818 static bool ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
819                           std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C2) {
820   std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
821 
822   // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
823   if (V1->size() > V2->size())
824     std::swap(V1, V2);
825 
826   if (V1->empty())
827     return false;
828   if (V1->size() == 1) {
829     // Just scan V2.
830     ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
831     for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
832       if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
833         return true;
834   }
835 
836   // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
837   array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
838   array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
839   unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
840   while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
841     if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
842       return true;
843     if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
844       ++i1;
845     else
846       ++i2;
847   }
848   return false;
849 }
850 
851 // Set branch weights on SwitchInst. This sets the metadata if there is at
852 // least one non-zero weight.
853 static void setBranchWeights(SwitchInst *SI, ArrayRef<uint32_t> Weights) {
854   // Check that there is at least one non-zero weight. Otherwise, pass
855   // nullptr to setMetadata which will erase the existing metadata.
856   MDNode *N = nullptr;
857   if (llvm::any_of(Weights, [](uint32_t W) { return W != 0; }))
858     N = MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).createBranchWeights(Weights);
859   SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, N);
860 }
861 
862 // Similar to the above, but for branch and select instructions that take
863 // exactly 2 weights.
864 static void setBranchWeights(Instruction *I, uint32_t TrueWeight,
865                              uint32_t FalseWeight) {
866   assert(isa<BranchInst>(I) || isa<SelectInst>(I));
867   // Check that there is at least one non-zero weight. Otherwise, pass
868   // nullptr to setMetadata which will erase the existing metadata.
869   MDNode *N = nullptr;
870   if (TrueWeight || FalseWeight)
871     N = MDBuilder(I->getParent()->getContext())
872             .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
873   I->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, N);
874 }
875 
876 /// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
877 /// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
878 /// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
879 /// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
880 /// very limited form of jump threading.
881 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(
882     Instruction *TI, BasicBlock *Pred, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
883   Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
884   if (!PredVal)
885     return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
886 
887   Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
888   assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
889   if (ThisVal != PredVal)
890     return false; // Different predicates.
891 
892   // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
893   // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
894 
895   // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
896   std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
897   BasicBlock *PredDef =
898       GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), PredCases);
899   EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
900 
901   // Find information about how control leaves this block.
902   std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
903   BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
904   EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
905 
906   // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
907   // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
908   if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
909     // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
910     // PredCases.  If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
911     // can simplify TI.
912     if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
913       return false;
914 
915     if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
916       // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead.  Convert it to a
917       // uncond br.
918       assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
919       // Insert the new branch.
920       Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
921       (void)NI;
922 
923       // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
924       ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(PredDef);
925 
926       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
927                         << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
928                         << "\n");
929 
930       EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(TI);
931 
932       if (DTU)
933         DTU->applyUpdates(
934             {{DominatorTree::Delete, PredDef, ThisCases[0].Dest}});
935 
936       return true;
937     }
938 
939     SwitchInstProfUpdateWrapper SI = *cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
940     // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
941     SmallPtrSet<Constant *, 16> DeadCases;
942     for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
943       DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
944 
945     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
946                       << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
947 
948     SmallDenseMap<BasicBlock *, int, 8> NumPerSuccessorCases;
949     for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
950       --i;
951       auto *Successor = i->getCaseSuccessor();
952       if (DTU)
953         ++NumPerSuccessorCases[Successor];
954       if (DeadCases.count(i->getCaseValue())) {
955         Successor->removePredecessor(PredDef);
956         SI.removeCase(i);
957         if (DTU)
958           --NumPerSuccessorCases[Successor];
959       }
960     }
961 
962     if (DTU) {
963       std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
964       for (const std::pair<BasicBlock *, int> &I : NumPerSuccessorCases)
965         if (I.second == 0)
966           Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, PredDef, I.first});
967       DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
968     }
969 
970     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
971     return true;
972   }
973 
974   // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value.  Find out
975   // which value (or set of values) this is.
976   ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
977   BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
978   for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
979     if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
980       if (TIV)
981         return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
982       TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
983     }
984   assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
985 
986   // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
987   // BB.  Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
988   BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
989   for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
990     if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
991       TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
992       break;
993     }
994 
995   // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
996   if (!TheRealDest)
997     TheRealDest = ThisDef;
998 
999   SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 2> RemovedSuccs;
1000 
1001   // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
1002   BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
1003   for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(TIBB))
1004     if (Succ != CheckEdge) {
1005       if (Succ != TheRealDest)
1006         RemovedSuccs.insert(Succ);
1007       Succ->removePredecessor(TIBB);
1008     } else
1009       CheckEdge = nullptr;
1010 
1011   // Insert the new branch.
1012   Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
1013   (void)NI;
1014 
1015   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
1016                     << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
1017                     << "\n");
1018 
1019   EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(TI);
1020   if (DTU) {
1021     SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 2> Updates;
1022     Updates.reserve(RemovedSuccs.size());
1023     for (auto *RemovedSucc : RemovedSuccs)
1024       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, TIBB, RemovedSucc});
1025     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
1026   }
1027   return true;
1028 }
1029 
1030 namespace {
1031 
1032 /// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
1033 /// integers that does not depend on their address.  This is important for
1034 /// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
1035 struct ConstantIntOrdering {
1036   bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
1037     return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
1038   }
1039 };
1040 
1041 } // end anonymous namespace
1042 
1043 static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
1044                                     ConstantInt *const *P2) {
1045   const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
1046   const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
1047   if (LHS == RHS)
1048     return 0;
1049   return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()) ? 1 : -1;
1050 }
1051 
1052 static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction *I) {
1053   MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
1054   if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
1055     if (MDString *MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
1056       return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
1057 
1058   return false;
1059 }
1060 
1061 /// Get Weights of a given terminator, the default weight is at the front
1062 /// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
1063 /// metadata.
1064 static void GetBranchWeights(Instruction *TI,
1065                              SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
1066   MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
1067   assert(MD);
1068   for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
1069     ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
1070     Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
1071   }
1072 
1073   // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
1074   // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
1075   // default weight to be the first entry.
1076   if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
1077     assert(Weights.size() == 2);
1078     ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
1079     if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
1080       std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
1081   }
1082 }
1083 
1084 /// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
1085 static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
1086   uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1087   if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
1088     unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
1089     for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
1090       I >>= Offset;
1091   }
1092 }
1093 
1094 static void CloneInstructionsIntoPredecessorBlockAndUpdateSSAUses(
1095     BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *PredBlock, ValueToValueMapTy &VMap) {
1096   Instruction *PTI = PredBlock->getTerminator();
1097 
1098   // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
1099   // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
1100   // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
1101   for (Instruction &BonusInst : *BB) {
1102     if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst) || BonusInst.isTerminator())
1103       continue;
1104 
1105     Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst.clone();
1106 
1107     if (PTI->getDebugLoc() != NewBonusInst->getDebugLoc()) {
1108       // Unless the instruction has the same !dbg location as the original
1109       // branch, drop it. When we fold the bonus instructions we want to make
1110       // sure we reset their debug locations in order to avoid stepping on
1111       // dead code caused by folding dead branches.
1112       NewBonusInst->setDebugLoc(DebugLoc());
1113     }
1114 
1115     RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
1116                      RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
1117     VMap[&BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
1118 
1119     // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
1120     // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
1121     // only given the branch precondition.
1122     // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
1123     // semantics we don't understand. We *can* preserve !annotation, because
1124     // it is tied to the instruction itself, not the value or position.
1125     // Similarly strip attributes on call parameters that may cause UB in
1126     // location the call is moved to.
1127     NewBonusInst->dropUndefImplyingAttrsAndUnknownMetadata(
1128         LLVMContext::MD_annotation);
1129 
1130     PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PTI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
1131     NewBonusInst->takeName(&BonusInst);
1132     BonusInst.setName(NewBonusInst->getName() + ".old");
1133 
1134     // Update (liveout) uses of bonus instructions,
1135     // now that the bonus instruction has been cloned into predecessor.
1136     // Note that we expect to be in a block-closed SSA form for this to work!
1137     for (Use &U : make_early_inc_range(BonusInst.uses())) {
1138       auto *UI = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser());
1139       auto *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(UI);
1140       if (!PN) {
1141         assert(UI->getParent() == BB && BonusInst.comesBefore(UI) &&
1142                "If the user is not a PHI node, then it should be in the same "
1143                "block as, and come after, the original bonus instruction.");
1144         continue; // Keep using the original bonus instruction.
1145       }
1146       // Is this the block-closed SSA form PHI node?
1147       if (PN->getIncomingBlock(U) == BB)
1148         continue; // Great, keep using the original bonus instruction.
1149       // The only other alternative is an "use" when coming from
1150       // the predecessor block - here we should refer to the cloned bonus instr.
1151       assert(PN->getIncomingBlock(U) == PredBlock &&
1152              "Not in block-closed SSA form?");
1153       U.set(NewBonusInst);
1154     }
1155   }
1156 }
1157 
1158 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::PerformValueComparisonIntoPredecessorFolding(
1159     Instruction *TI, Value *&CV, Instruction *PTI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
1160   BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
1161   BasicBlock *Pred = PTI->getParent();
1162 
1163   SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 32> Updates;
1164 
1165   // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
1166   std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
1167   BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
1168 
1169   std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
1170   BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
1171 
1172   // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
1173   // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
1174   // build.
1175   SmallMapVector<BasicBlock *, int, 8> NewSuccessors;
1176 
1177   // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
1178   SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
1179   bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
1180   bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
1181 
1182   if (PredHasWeights) {
1183     GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
1184     // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
1185     if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
1186       PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1187   } else if (SuccHasWeights)
1188     // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
1189     // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
1190     // successor's weights
1191     Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
1192 
1193   SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
1194   if (SuccHasWeights) {
1195     GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
1196     // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
1197     if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
1198       PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1199   } else if (PredHasWeights)
1200     SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
1201 
1202   if (PredDefault == BB) {
1203     // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
1204     // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
1205     std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
1206     for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1207       if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
1208         PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
1209       else {
1210         // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
1211         std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
1212 
1213         if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1214           // Increase weight for the default case.
1215           Weights[0] += Weights[i + 1];
1216           std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
1217           Weights.pop_back();
1218         }
1219 
1220         PredCases.pop_back();
1221         --i;
1222         --e;
1223       }
1224 
1225     // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
1226     if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
1227       PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
1228       if (DTU && PredDefault != BB)
1229         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, Pred, PredDefault});
1230       PredDefault = BBDefault;
1231       ++NewSuccessors[BBDefault];
1232     }
1233 
1234     unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
1235     uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
1236     for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1237       if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) && BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
1238         PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1239         ++NewSuccessors[BBCases[i].Dest];
1240         if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1241           // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
1242           // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
1243           // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
1244           Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i + 1]);
1245           ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i + 1];
1246         }
1247       }
1248 
1249     if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1250       ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
1251       // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
1252       for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
1253         Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
1254       // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
1255       Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
1256     }
1257   } else {
1258     // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
1259     // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
1260     // activated.
1261     std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
1262     std::map<ConstantInt *, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
1263     for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1264       if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
1265         PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
1266 
1267         if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1268           WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i + 1];
1269           std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
1270           Weights.pop_back();
1271         }
1272 
1273         std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
1274         PredCases.pop_back();
1275         --i;
1276         --e;
1277       }
1278 
1279     // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
1280     // predecessor.  Figure out where they will all go now.
1281     for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1282       if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
1283         // If this is one we are capable of getting...
1284         if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1285           Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
1286         PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1287         ++NewSuccessors[BBCases[i].Dest];
1288         PTIHandled.erase(BBCases[i].Value); // This constant is taken care of
1289       }
1290 
1291     // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
1292     // they must go to the default destination of TI.
1293     for (ConstantInt *I : PTIHandled) {
1294       if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1295         Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[I]);
1296       PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(I, BBDefault));
1297       ++NewSuccessors[BBDefault];
1298     }
1299   }
1300 
1301   // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get.  Make
1302   // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
1303   // successors.
1304   SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 2> SuccsOfPred;
1305   if (DTU) {
1306     SuccsOfPred = {succ_begin(Pred), succ_end(Pred)};
1307     Updates.reserve(Updates.size() + NewSuccessors.size());
1308   }
1309   for (const std::pair<BasicBlock *, int /*Num*/> &NewSuccessor :
1310        NewSuccessors) {
1311     for (auto I : seq(0, NewSuccessor.second)) {
1312       (void)I;
1313       AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor.first, Pred, BB);
1314     }
1315     if (DTU && !SuccsOfPred.contains(NewSuccessor.first))
1316       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, Pred, NewSuccessor.first});
1317   }
1318 
1319   Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
1320   // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
1321   if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
1322     CV =
1323         Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()), "magicptr");
1324   }
1325 
1326   // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
1327   SwitchInst *NewSI = Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, PredCases.size());
1328   NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
1329   for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1330     NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
1331 
1332   if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1333     // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1334     FitWeights(Weights);
1335 
1336     SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1337 
1338     setBranchWeights(NewSI, MDWeights);
1339   }
1340 
1341   EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(PTI);
1342 
1343   // Okay, last check.  If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1344   // have an infinite loop case.  If so, add an infinitely looping block
1345   // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
1346   BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
1347   for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1348     if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
1349       if (!InfLoopBlock) {
1350         // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
1351         // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
1352         InfLoopBlock =
1353             BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
1354         BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
1355         if (DTU)
1356           Updates.push_back(
1357               {DominatorTree::Insert, InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock});
1358       }
1359       NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1360     }
1361 
1362   if (DTU) {
1363     if (InfLoopBlock)
1364       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, Pred, InfLoopBlock});
1365 
1366     Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, Pred, BB});
1367 
1368     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
1369   }
1370 
1371   ++NumFoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors;
1372   return true;
1373 }
1374 
1375 /// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
1376 /// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
1377 /// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
1378 /// on the same value.  If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
1379 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(Instruction *TI,
1380                                                          IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
1381   BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
1382   Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
1383   assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
1384 
1385   bool Changed = false;
1386 
1387   SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
1388   while (!Preds.empty()) {
1389     BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
1390     Instruction *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
1391 
1392     // Don't try to fold into itself.
1393     if (Pred == BB)
1394       continue;
1395 
1396     // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
1397     Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
1398     if (PCV != CV)
1399       continue;
1400 
1401     SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> FailBlocks;
1402     if (!SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI, &FailBlocks)) {
1403       for (auto *Succ : FailBlocks) {
1404         if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(Succ, TI->getParent(), ".fold.split", DTU))
1405           return false;
1406       }
1407     }
1408 
1409     PerformValueComparisonIntoPredecessorFolding(TI, CV, PTI, Builder);
1410     Changed = true;
1411   }
1412   return Changed;
1413 }
1414 
1415 // If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1416 // (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1417 // can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
1418 static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1419                                 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
1420   for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
1421     for (const PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1422       Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1423       Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1424       if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V == I1 || BB2V == I2)) {
1425         return false;
1426       }
1427     }
1428   }
1429   return true;
1430 }
1431 
1432 static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I, bool PtrValueMayBeModified = false);
1433 
1434 /// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1435 /// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1436 /// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2. If EqTermsOnly is given,
1437 /// only perform hoisting in case both blocks only contain a terminator. In that
1438 /// case, only the original BI will be replaced and selects for PHIs are added.
1439 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
1440                                            const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
1441                                            bool EqTermsOnly) {
1442   // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1443   // instructions in the two blocks.  In particular, we don't want to get into
1444   // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2.  As
1445   // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1446   // identical order.
1447   BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1448   BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
1449 
1450   // If either of the blocks has it's address taken, then we can't do this fold,
1451   // because the code we'd hoist would no longer run when we jump into the block
1452   // by it's address.
1453   if (BB1->hasAddressTaken() || BB2->hasAddressTaken())
1454     return false;
1455 
1456   BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1457   BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1458 
1459   Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
1460   // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1461   DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1462   DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1463   if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1464     while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1465       I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1466     while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1467       I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
1468   }
1469   if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2))
1470     return false;
1471 
1472   BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
1473 
1474   bool Changed = false;
1475 
1476   auto _ = make_scope_exit([&]() {
1477     if (Changed)
1478       ++NumHoistCommonCode;
1479   });
1480 
1481   // Check if only hoisting terminators is allowed. This does not add new
1482   // instructions to the hoist location.
1483   if (EqTermsOnly) {
1484     // Skip any debug intrinsics, as they are free to hoist.
1485     auto *I1NonDbg = &*skipDebugIntrinsics(I1->getIterator());
1486     auto *I2NonDbg = &*skipDebugIntrinsics(I2->getIterator());
1487     if (!I1NonDbg->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2NonDbg))
1488       return false;
1489     if (!I1NonDbg->isTerminator())
1490       return false;
1491     // Now we know that we only need to hoist debug intrinsics and the
1492     // terminator. Let the loop below handle those 2 cases.
1493   }
1494 
1495   do {
1496     // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1497     // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1498     if (I1->isTerminator())
1499       goto HoistTerminator;
1500 
1501     // Hoisting token-returning instructions would obscure the origin.
1502     if (I1->getType()->isTokenTy())
1503       return Changed;
1504 
1505     // If we're going to hoist a call, make sure that the two instructions we're
1506     // commoning/hoisting are both marked with musttail, or neither of them is
1507     // marked as such. Otherwise, we might end up in a situation where we hoist
1508     // from a block where the terminator is a `ret` to a block where the terminator
1509     // is a `br`, and `musttail` calls expect to be followed by a return.
1510     auto *C1 = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I1);
1511     auto *C2 = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I2);
1512     if (C1 && C2)
1513       if (C1->isMustTailCall() != C2->isMustTailCall())
1514         return Changed;
1515 
1516     if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1517       return Changed;
1518 
1519     // If any of the two call sites has nomerge attribute, stop hoisting.
1520     if (const auto *CB1 = dyn_cast<CallBase>(I1))
1521       if (CB1->cannotMerge())
1522         return Changed;
1523     if (const auto *CB2 = dyn_cast<CallBase>(I2))
1524       if (CB2->cannotMerge())
1525         return Changed;
1526 
1527     if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2)) {
1528       assert (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1) && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2));
1529       // The debug location is an integral part of a debug info intrinsic
1530       // and can't be separated from it or replaced.  Instead of attempting
1531       // to merge locations, simply hoist both copies of the intrinsic.
1532       BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
1533                                      BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1534       BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
1535                                      BB2->getInstList(), I2);
1536       Changed = true;
1537     } else {
1538       // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1539       // then replace all uses of the other with the first.  Finally, we remove
1540       // the now redundant second instruction.
1541       BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
1542                                      BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1543       if (!I2->use_empty())
1544         I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1545       I1->andIRFlags(I2);
1546       unsigned KnownIDs[] = {LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1547                              LLVMContext::MD_range,
1548                              LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
1549                              LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
1550                              LLVMContext::MD_nonnull,
1551                              LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1552                              LLVMContext::MD_align,
1553                              LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
1554                              LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null,
1555                              LLVMContext::MD_mem_parallel_loop_access,
1556                              LLVMContext::MD_access_group,
1557                              LLVMContext::MD_preserve_access_index};
1558       combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs, true);
1559 
1560       // I1 and I2 are being combined into a single instruction.  Its debug
1561       // location is the merged locations of the original instructions.
1562       I1->applyMergedLocation(I1->getDebugLoc(), I2->getDebugLoc());
1563 
1564       I2->eraseFromParent();
1565       Changed = true;
1566     }
1567     ++NumHoistCommonInstrs;
1568 
1569     I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1570     I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
1571     // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1572     DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1573     DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1574     if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1575       while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1576         I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1577       while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1578         I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
1579     }
1580   } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
1581 
1582   return true;
1583 
1584 HoistTerminator:
1585   // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1586   // FIXME: Can we define a safety predicate for CallBr?
1587   if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
1588     return Changed;
1589 
1590   // TODO: callbr hoisting currently disabled pending further study.
1591   if (isa<CallBrInst>(I1))
1592     return Changed;
1593 
1594   for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
1595     for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1596       Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1597       Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1598       if (BB1V == BB2V)
1599         continue;
1600 
1601       // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1602       // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
1603       if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, &PN) ||
1604           passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, &PN))
1605         return Changed;
1606 
1607       if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
1608         return Changed;
1609       if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
1610         return Changed;
1611     }
1612   }
1613 
1614   // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
1615   Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
1616   BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
1617   if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
1618     I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1619     I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1620     NT->takeName(I1);
1621   }
1622   Changed = true;
1623   ++NumHoistCommonInstrs;
1624 
1625   // Ensure terminator gets a debug location, even an unknown one, in case
1626   // it involves inlinable calls.
1627   NT->applyMergedLocation(I1->getDebugLoc(), I2->getDebugLoc());
1628 
1629   // PHIs created below will adopt NT's merged DebugLoc.
1630   IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(NT);
1631 
1632   // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1633   // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1634   // them.  If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1635   // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
1636   std::map<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, SelectInst *> InsertedSelects;
1637   for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
1638     for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1639       Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1640       Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1641       if (BB1V == BB2V)
1642         continue;
1643 
1644       // These values do not agree.  Insert a select instruction before NT
1645       // that determines the right value.
1646       SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
1647       if (!SI) {
1648         // Propagate fast-math-flags from phi node to its replacement select.
1649         IRBuilder<>::FastMathFlagGuard FMFGuard(Builder);
1650         if (isa<FPMathOperator>(PN))
1651           Builder.setFastMathFlags(PN.getFastMathFlags());
1652 
1653         SI = cast<SelectInst>(
1654             Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1655                                  BB1V->getName() + "." + BB2V->getName(), BI));
1656       }
1657 
1658       // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
1659       for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN.getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1660         if (PN.getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN.getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1661           PN.setIncomingValue(i, SI);
1662     }
1663   }
1664 
1665   SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 4> Updates;
1666 
1667   // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
1668   for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
1669     AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, BIParent, BB1);
1670     if (DTU)
1671       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, BIParent, Succ});
1672   }
1673 
1674   if (DTU)
1675     for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BI))
1676       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BIParent, Succ});
1677 
1678   EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
1679   if (DTU)
1680     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
1681   return Changed;
1682 }
1683 
1684 // Check lifetime markers.
1685 static bool isLifeTimeMarker(const Instruction *I) {
1686   if (auto II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(I)) {
1687     switch (II->getIntrinsicID()) {
1688     default:
1689       break;
1690     case Intrinsic::lifetime_start:
1691     case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
1692       return true;
1693     }
1694   }
1695   return false;
1696 }
1697 
1698 // TODO: Refine this. This should avoid cases like turning constant memcpy sizes
1699 // into variables.
1700 static bool replacingOperandWithVariableIsCheap(const Instruction *I,
1701                                                 int OpIdx) {
1702   return !isa<IntrinsicInst>(I);
1703 }
1704 
1705 // All instructions in Insts belong to different blocks that all unconditionally
1706 // branch to a common successor. Analyze each instruction and return true if it
1707 // would be possible to sink them into their successor, creating one common
1708 // instruction instead. For every value that would be required to be provided by
1709 // PHI node (because an operand varies in each input block), add to PHIOperands.
1710 static bool canSinkInstructions(
1711     ArrayRef<Instruction *> Insts,
1712     DenseMap<Instruction *, SmallVector<Value *, 4>> &PHIOperands) {
1713   // Prune out obviously bad instructions to move. Each instruction must have
1714   // exactly zero or one use, and we check later that use is by a single, common
1715   // PHI instruction in the successor.
1716   bool HasUse = !Insts.front()->user_empty();
1717   for (auto *I : Insts) {
1718     // These instructions may change or break semantics if moved.
1719     if (isa<PHINode>(I) || I->isEHPad() || isa<AllocaInst>(I) ||
1720         I->getType()->isTokenTy())
1721       return false;
1722 
1723     // Do not try to sink an instruction in an infinite loop - it can cause
1724     // this algorithm to infinite loop.
1725     if (I->getParent()->getSingleSuccessor() == I->getParent())
1726       return false;
1727 
1728     // Conservatively return false if I is an inline-asm instruction. Sinking
1729     // and merging inline-asm instructions can potentially create arguments
1730     // that cannot satisfy the inline-asm constraints.
1731     // If the instruction has nomerge attribute, return false.
1732     if (const auto *C = dyn_cast<CallBase>(I))
1733       if (C->isInlineAsm() || C->cannotMerge())
1734         return false;
1735 
1736     // Each instruction must have zero or one use.
1737     if (HasUse && !I->hasOneUse())
1738       return false;
1739     if (!HasUse && !I->user_empty())
1740       return false;
1741   }
1742 
1743   const Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
1744   for (auto *I : Insts)
1745     if (!I->isSameOperationAs(I0))
1746       return false;
1747 
1748   // All instructions in Insts are known to be the same opcode. If they have a
1749   // use, check that the only user is a PHI or in the same block as the
1750   // instruction, because if a user is in the same block as an instruction we're
1751   // contemplating sinking, it must already be determined to be sinkable.
1752   if (HasUse) {
1753     auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1754     auto *Succ = I0->getParent()->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1755     if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse,&Succ](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
1756           auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
1757           return (PNUse &&
1758                   PNUse->getParent() == Succ &&
1759                   PNUse->getIncomingValueForBlock(I->getParent()) == I) ||
1760                  U->getParent() == I->getParent();
1761         }))
1762       return false;
1763   }
1764 
1765   // Because SROA can't handle speculating stores of selects, try not to sink
1766   // loads, stores or lifetime markers of allocas when we'd have to create a
1767   // PHI for the address operand. Also, because it is likely that loads or
1768   // stores of allocas will disappear when Mem2Reg/SROA is run, don't sink
1769   // them.
1770   // This can cause code churn which can have unintended consequences down
1771   // the line - see https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30244.
1772   // FIXME: This is a workaround for a deficiency in SROA - see
1773   // https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30188
1774   if (isa<StoreInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1775         return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(1)->stripPointerCasts());
1776       }))
1777     return false;
1778   if (isa<LoadInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1779         return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(0)->stripPointerCasts());
1780       }))
1781     return false;
1782   if (isLifeTimeMarker(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1783         return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(1)->stripPointerCasts());
1784       }))
1785     return false;
1786 
1787   // For calls to be sinkable, they must all be indirect, or have same callee.
1788   // I.e. if we have two direct calls to different callees, we don't want to
1789   // turn that into an indirect call. Likewise, if we have an indirect call,
1790   // and a direct call, we don't actually want to have a single indirect call.
1791   if (isa<CallBase>(I0)) {
1792     auto IsIndirectCall = [](const Instruction *I) {
1793       return cast<CallBase>(I)->isIndirectCall();
1794     };
1795     bool HaveIndirectCalls = any_of(Insts, IsIndirectCall);
1796     bool AllCallsAreIndirect = all_of(Insts, IsIndirectCall);
1797     if (HaveIndirectCalls) {
1798       if (!AllCallsAreIndirect)
1799         return false;
1800     } else {
1801       // All callees must be identical.
1802       Value *Callee = nullptr;
1803       for (const Instruction *I : Insts) {
1804         Value *CurrCallee = cast<CallBase>(I)->getCalledOperand();
1805         if (!Callee)
1806           Callee = CurrCallee;
1807         else if (Callee != CurrCallee)
1808           return false;
1809       }
1810     }
1811   }
1812 
1813   for (unsigned OI = 0, OE = I0->getNumOperands(); OI != OE; ++OI) {
1814     Value *Op = I0->getOperand(OI);
1815     if (Op->getType()->isTokenTy())
1816       // Don't touch any operand of token type.
1817       return false;
1818 
1819     auto SameAsI0 = [&I0, OI](const Instruction *I) {
1820       assert(I->getNumOperands() == I0->getNumOperands());
1821       return I->getOperand(OI) == I0->getOperand(OI);
1822     };
1823     if (!all_of(Insts, SameAsI0)) {
1824       if ((isa<Constant>(Op) && !replacingOperandWithVariableIsCheap(I0, OI)) ||
1825           !canReplaceOperandWithVariable(I0, OI))
1826         // We can't create a PHI from this GEP.
1827         return false;
1828       for (auto *I : Insts)
1829         PHIOperands[I].push_back(I->getOperand(OI));
1830     }
1831   }
1832   return true;
1833 }
1834 
1835 // Assuming canSinkInstructions(Blocks) has returned true, sink the last
1836 // instruction of every block in Blocks to their common successor, commoning
1837 // into one instruction.
1838 static bool sinkLastInstruction(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) {
1839   auto *BBEnd = Blocks[0]->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1840 
1841   // canSinkInstructions returning true guarantees that every block has at
1842   // least one non-terminator instruction.
1843   SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
1844   for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
1845     Instruction *I = BB->getTerminator();
1846     do {
1847       I = I->getPrevNode();
1848     } while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) && I != &BB->front());
1849     if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1850       Insts.push_back(I);
1851   }
1852 
1853   // The only checking we need to do now is that all users of all instructions
1854   // are the same PHI node. canSinkInstructions should have checked this but
1855   // it is slightly over-aggressive - it gets confused by commutative
1856   // instructions so double-check it here.
1857   Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
1858   if (!I0->user_empty()) {
1859     auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1860     if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
1861           auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
1862           return U == PNUse;
1863         }))
1864       return false;
1865   }
1866 
1867   // We don't need to do any more checking here; canSinkInstructions should
1868   // have done it all for us.
1869   SmallVector<Value*, 4> NewOperands;
1870   for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O) {
1871     // This check is different to that in canSinkInstructions. There, we
1872     // cared about the global view once simplifycfg (and instcombine) have
1873     // completed - it takes into account PHIs that become trivially
1874     // simplifiable.  However here we need a more local view; if an operand
1875     // differs we create a PHI and rely on instcombine to clean up the very
1876     // small mess we may make.
1877     bool NeedPHI = any_of(Insts, [&I0, O](const Instruction *I) {
1878       return I->getOperand(O) != I0->getOperand(O);
1879     });
1880     if (!NeedPHI) {
1881       NewOperands.push_back(I0->getOperand(O));
1882       continue;
1883     }
1884 
1885     // Create a new PHI in the successor block and populate it.
1886     auto *Op = I0->getOperand(O);
1887     assert(!Op->getType()->isTokenTy() && "Can't PHI tokens!");
1888     auto *PN = PHINode::Create(Op->getType(), Insts.size(),
1889                                Op->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
1890     for (auto *I : Insts)
1891       PN->addIncoming(I->getOperand(O), I->getParent());
1892     NewOperands.push_back(PN);
1893   }
1894 
1895   // Arbitrarily use I0 as the new "common" instruction; remap its operands
1896   // and move it to the start of the successor block.
1897   for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O)
1898     I0->getOperandUse(O).set(NewOperands[O]);
1899   I0->moveBefore(&*BBEnd->getFirstInsertionPt());
1900 
1901   // Update metadata and IR flags, and merge debug locations.
1902   for (auto *I : Insts)
1903     if (I != I0) {
1904       // The debug location for the "common" instruction is the merged locations
1905       // of all the commoned instructions.  We start with the original location
1906       // of the "common" instruction and iteratively merge each location in the
1907       // loop below.
1908       // This is an N-way merge, which will be inefficient if I0 is a CallInst.
1909       // However, as N-way merge for CallInst is rare, so we use simplified API
1910       // instead of using complex API for N-way merge.
1911       I0->applyMergedLocation(I0->getDebugLoc(), I->getDebugLoc());
1912       combineMetadataForCSE(I0, I, true);
1913       I0->andIRFlags(I);
1914     }
1915 
1916   if (!I0->user_empty()) {
1917     // canSinkLastInstruction checked that all instructions were used by
1918     // one and only one PHI node. Find that now, RAUW it to our common
1919     // instruction and nuke it.
1920     auto *PN = cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1921     PN->replaceAllUsesWith(I0);
1922     PN->eraseFromParent();
1923   }
1924 
1925   // Finally nuke all instructions apart from the common instruction.
1926   for (auto *I : Insts)
1927     if (I != I0)
1928       I->eraseFromParent();
1929 
1930   return true;
1931 }
1932 
1933 namespace {
1934 
1935   // LockstepReverseIterator - Iterates through instructions
1936   // in a set of blocks in reverse order from the first non-terminator.
1937   // For example (assume all blocks have size n):
1938   //   LockstepReverseIterator I([B1, B2, B3]);
1939   //   *I-- = [B1[n], B2[n], B3[n]];
1940   //   *I-- = [B1[n-1], B2[n-1], B3[n-1]];
1941   //   *I-- = [B1[n-2], B2[n-2], B3[n-2]];
1942   //   ...
1943   class LockstepReverseIterator {
1944     ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks;
1945     SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
1946     bool Fail;
1947 
1948   public:
1949     LockstepReverseIterator(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) : Blocks(Blocks) {
1950       reset();
1951     }
1952 
1953     void reset() {
1954       Fail = false;
1955       Insts.clear();
1956       for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
1957         Instruction *Inst = BB->getTerminator();
1958         for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1959           Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
1960         if (!Inst) {
1961           // Block wasn't big enough.
1962           Fail = true;
1963           return;
1964         }
1965         Insts.push_back(Inst);
1966       }
1967     }
1968 
1969     bool isValid() const {
1970       return !Fail;
1971     }
1972 
1973     void operator--() {
1974       if (Fail)
1975         return;
1976       for (auto *&Inst : Insts) {
1977         for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1978           Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
1979         // Already at beginning of block.
1980         if (!Inst) {
1981           Fail = true;
1982           return;
1983         }
1984       }
1985     }
1986 
1987     void operator++() {
1988       if (Fail)
1989         return;
1990       for (auto *&Inst : Insts) {
1991         for (Inst = Inst->getNextNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1992           Inst = Inst->getNextNode();
1993         // Already at end of block.
1994         if (!Inst) {
1995           Fail = true;
1996           return;
1997         }
1998       }
1999     }
2000 
2001     ArrayRef<Instruction*> operator * () const {
2002       return Insts;
2003     }
2004   };
2005 
2006 } // end anonymous namespace
2007 
2008 /// Check whether BB's predecessors end with unconditional branches. If it is
2009 /// true, sink any common code from the predecessors to BB.
2010 static bool SinkCommonCodeFromPredecessors(BasicBlock *BB,
2011                                            DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
2012   // We support two situations:
2013   //   (1) all incoming arcs are unconditional
2014   //   (2) there are non-unconditional incoming arcs
2015   //
2016   // (2) is very common in switch defaults and
2017   // else-if patterns;
2018   //
2019   //   if (a) f(1);
2020   //   else if (b) f(2);
2021   //
2022   // produces:
2023   //
2024   //       [if]
2025   //      /    \
2026   //    [f(1)] [if]
2027   //      |     | \
2028   //      |     |  |
2029   //      |  [f(2)]|
2030   //       \    | /
2031   //        [ end ]
2032   //
2033   // [end] has two unconditional predecessor arcs and one conditional. The
2034   // conditional refers to the implicit empty 'else' arc. This conditional
2035   // arc can also be caused by an empty default block in a switch.
2036   //
2037   // In this case, we attempt to sink code from all *unconditional* arcs.
2038   // If we can sink instructions from these arcs (determined during the scan
2039   // phase below) we insert a common successor for all unconditional arcs and
2040   // connect that to [end], to enable sinking:
2041   //
2042   //       [if]
2043   //      /    \
2044   //    [x(1)] [if]
2045   //      |     | \
2046   //      |     |  \
2047   //      |  [x(2)] |
2048   //       \   /    |
2049   //   [sink.split] |
2050   //         \     /
2051   //         [ end ]
2052   //
2053   SmallVector<BasicBlock*,4> UnconditionalPreds;
2054   bool HaveNonUnconditionalPredecessors = false;
2055   for (auto *PredBB : predecessors(BB)) {
2056     auto *PredBr = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBB->getTerminator());
2057     if (PredBr && PredBr->isUnconditional())
2058       UnconditionalPreds.push_back(PredBB);
2059     else
2060       HaveNonUnconditionalPredecessors = true;
2061   }
2062   if (UnconditionalPreds.size() < 2)
2063     return false;
2064 
2065   // We take a two-step approach to tail sinking. First we scan from the end of
2066   // each block upwards in lockstep. If the n'th instruction from the end of each
2067   // block can be sunk, those instructions are added to ValuesToSink and we
2068   // carry on. If we can sink an instruction but need to PHI-merge some operands
2069   // (because they're not identical in each instruction) we add these to
2070   // PHIOperands.
2071   int ScanIdx = 0;
2072   SmallPtrSet<Value*,4> InstructionsToSink;
2073   DenseMap<Instruction*, SmallVector<Value*,4>> PHIOperands;
2074   LockstepReverseIterator LRI(UnconditionalPreds);
2075   while (LRI.isValid() &&
2076          canSinkInstructions(*LRI, PHIOperands)) {
2077     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: instruction can be sunk: " << *(*LRI)[0]
2078                       << "\n");
2079     InstructionsToSink.insert((*LRI).begin(), (*LRI).end());
2080     ++ScanIdx;
2081     --LRI;
2082   }
2083 
2084   // If no instructions can be sunk, early-return.
2085   if (ScanIdx == 0)
2086     return false;
2087 
2088   bool followedByDeoptOrUnreachable = IsBlockFollowedByDeoptOrUnreachable(BB);
2089 
2090   if (!followedByDeoptOrUnreachable) {
2091     // Okay, we *could* sink last ScanIdx instructions. But how many can we
2092     // actually sink before encountering instruction that is unprofitable to
2093     // sink?
2094     auto ProfitableToSinkInstruction = [&](LockstepReverseIterator &LRI) {
2095       unsigned NumPHIdValues = 0;
2096       for (auto *I : *LRI)
2097         for (auto *V : PHIOperands[I]) {
2098           if (!InstructionsToSink.contains(V))
2099             ++NumPHIdValues;
2100           // FIXME: this check is overly optimistic. We may end up not sinking
2101           // said instruction, due to the very same profitability check.
2102           // See @creating_too_many_phis in sink-common-code.ll.
2103         }
2104       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: #phid values: " << NumPHIdValues << "\n");
2105       unsigned NumPHIInsts = NumPHIdValues / UnconditionalPreds.size();
2106       if ((NumPHIdValues % UnconditionalPreds.size()) != 0)
2107         NumPHIInsts++;
2108 
2109       return NumPHIInsts <= 1;
2110     };
2111 
2112     // We've determined that we are going to sink last ScanIdx instructions,
2113     // and recorded them in InstructionsToSink. Now, some instructions may be
2114     // unprofitable to sink. But that determination depends on the instructions
2115     // that we are going to sink.
2116 
2117     // First, forward scan: find the first instruction unprofitable to sink,
2118     // recording all the ones that are profitable to sink.
2119     // FIXME: would it be better, after we detect that not all are profitable.
2120     // to either record the profitable ones, or erase the unprofitable ones?
2121     // Maybe we need to choose (at runtime) the one that will touch least
2122     // instrs?
2123     LRI.reset();
2124     int Idx = 0;
2125     SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> InstructionsProfitableToSink;
2126     while (Idx < ScanIdx) {
2127       if (!ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI)) {
2128         // Too many PHIs would be created.
2129         LLVM_DEBUG(
2130             dbgs() << "SINK: stopping here, too many PHIs would be created!\n");
2131         break;
2132       }
2133       InstructionsProfitableToSink.insert((*LRI).begin(), (*LRI).end());
2134       --LRI;
2135       ++Idx;
2136     }
2137 
2138     // If no instructions can be sunk, early-return.
2139     if (Idx == 0)
2140       return false;
2141 
2142     // Did we determine that (only) some instructions are unprofitable to sink?
2143     if (Idx < ScanIdx) {
2144       // Okay, some instructions are unprofitable.
2145       ScanIdx = Idx;
2146       InstructionsToSink = InstructionsProfitableToSink;
2147 
2148       // But, that may make other instructions unprofitable, too.
2149       // So, do a backward scan, do any earlier instructions become
2150       // unprofitable?
2151       assert(
2152           !ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI) &&
2153           "We already know that the last instruction is unprofitable to sink");
2154       ++LRI;
2155       --Idx;
2156       while (Idx >= 0) {
2157         // If we detect that an instruction becomes unprofitable to sink,
2158         // all earlier instructions won't be sunk either,
2159         // so preemptively keep InstructionsProfitableToSink in sync.
2160         // FIXME: is this the most performant approach?
2161         for (auto *I : *LRI)
2162           InstructionsProfitableToSink.erase(I);
2163         if (!ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI)) {
2164           // Everything starting with this instruction won't be sunk.
2165           ScanIdx = Idx;
2166           InstructionsToSink = InstructionsProfitableToSink;
2167         }
2168         ++LRI;
2169         --Idx;
2170       }
2171     }
2172 
2173     // If no instructions can be sunk, early-return.
2174     if (ScanIdx == 0)
2175       return false;
2176   }
2177 
2178   bool Changed = false;
2179 
2180   if (HaveNonUnconditionalPredecessors) {
2181     if (!followedByDeoptOrUnreachable) {
2182       // It is always legal to sink common instructions from unconditional
2183       // predecessors. However, if not all predecessors are unconditional,
2184       // this transformation might be pessimizing. So as a rule of thumb,
2185       // don't do it unless we'd sink at least one non-speculatable instruction.
2186       // See https://bugs.llvm.org/show_bug.cgi?id=30244
2187       LRI.reset();
2188       int Idx = 0;
2189       bool Profitable = false;
2190       while (Idx < ScanIdx) {
2191         if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute((*LRI)[0])) {
2192           Profitable = true;
2193           break;
2194         }
2195         --LRI;
2196         ++Idx;
2197       }
2198       if (!Profitable)
2199         return false;
2200     }
2201 
2202     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Splitting edge\n");
2203     // We have a conditional edge and we're going to sink some instructions.
2204     // Insert a new block postdominating all blocks we're going to sink from.
2205     if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(BB, UnconditionalPreds, ".sink.split", DTU))
2206       // Edges couldn't be split.
2207       return false;
2208     Changed = true;
2209   }
2210 
2211   // Now that we've analyzed all potential sinking candidates, perform the
2212   // actual sink. We iteratively sink the last non-terminator of the source
2213   // blocks into their common successor unless doing so would require too
2214   // many PHI instructions to be generated (currently only one PHI is allowed
2215   // per sunk instruction).
2216   //
2217   // We can use InstructionsToSink to discount values needing PHI-merging that will
2218   // actually be sunk in a later iteration. This allows us to be more
2219   // aggressive in what we sink. This does allow a false positive where we
2220   // sink presuming a later value will also be sunk, but stop half way through
2221   // and never actually sink it which means we produce more PHIs than intended.
2222   // This is unlikely in practice though.
2223   int SinkIdx = 0;
2224   for (; SinkIdx != ScanIdx; ++SinkIdx) {
2225     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Sink: "
2226                       << *UnconditionalPreds[0]->getTerminator()->getPrevNode()
2227                       << "\n");
2228 
2229     // Because we've sunk every instruction in turn, the current instruction to
2230     // sink is always at index 0.
2231     LRI.reset();
2232 
2233     if (!sinkLastInstruction(UnconditionalPreds)) {
2234       LLVM_DEBUG(
2235           dbgs()
2236           << "SINK: stopping here, failed to actually sink instruction!\n");
2237       break;
2238     }
2239 
2240     NumSinkCommonInstrs++;
2241     Changed = true;
2242   }
2243   if (SinkIdx != 0)
2244     ++NumSinkCommonCode;
2245   return Changed;
2246 }
2247 
2248 namespace {
2249 
2250 struct CompatibleSets {
2251   using SetTy = SmallVector<InvokeInst *, 2>;
2252 
2253   SmallVector<SetTy, 1> Sets;
2254 
2255   static bool shouldBelongToSameSet(ArrayRef<InvokeInst *> Invokes);
2256 
2257   SetTy &getCompatibleSet(InvokeInst *II);
2258 
2259   void insert(InvokeInst *II);
2260 };
2261 
2262 CompatibleSets::SetTy &CompatibleSets::getCompatibleSet(InvokeInst *II) {
2263   // Perform a linear scan over all the existing sets, see if the new `invoke`
2264   // is compatible with any particular set. Since we know that all the `invokes`
2265   // within a set are compatible, only check the first `invoke` in each set.
2266   // WARNING: at worst, this has quadratic complexity.
2267   for (CompatibleSets::SetTy &Set : Sets) {
2268     if (CompatibleSets::shouldBelongToSameSet({Set.front(), II}))
2269       return Set;
2270   }
2271 
2272   // Otherwise, we either had no sets yet, or this invoke forms a new set.
2273   return Sets.emplace_back();
2274 }
2275 
2276 void CompatibleSets::insert(InvokeInst *II) {
2277   getCompatibleSet(II).emplace_back(II);
2278 }
2279 
2280 bool CompatibleSets::shouldBelongToSameSet(ArrayRef<InvokeInst *> Invokes) {
2281   assert(Invokes.size() == 2 && "Always called with exactly two candidates.");
2282 
2283   // Can we theoretically merge these `invoke`s?
2284   auto IsIllegalToMerge = [](InvokeInst *II) {
2285     return II->cannotMerge() || II->isInlineAsm();
2286   };
2287   if (any_of(Invokes, IsIllegalToMerge))
2288     return false;
2289 
2290   // Either both `invoke`s must be   direct,
2291   // or     both `invoke`s must be indirect.
2292   auto IsIndirectCall = [](InvokeInst *II) { return II->isIndirectCall(); };
2293   bool HaveIndirectCalls = any_of(Invokes, IsIndirectCall);
2294   bool AllCallsAreIndirect = all_of(Invokes, IsIndirectCall);
2295   if (HaveIndirectCalls) {
2296     if (!AllCallsAreIndirect)
2297       return false;
2298   } else {
2299     // All callees must be identical.
2300     Value *Callee = nullptr;
2301     for (InvokeInst *II : Invokes) {
2302       Value *CurrCallee = II->getCalledOperand();
2303       assert(CurrCallee && "There is always a called operand.");
2304       if (!Callee)
2305         Callee = CurrCallee;
2306       else if (Callee != CurrCallee)
2307         return false;
2308     }
2309   }
2310 
2311   // Either both `invoke`s must not have a normal destination,
2312   // or     both `invoke`s must     have a normal destination,
2313   auto HasNormalDest = [](InvokeInst *II) {
2314     return !isa<UnreachableInst>(II->getNormalDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
2315   };
2316   if (any_of(Invokes, HasNormalDest)) {
2317     // Do not merge `invoke` that does not have a normal destination with one
2318     // that does have a normal destination, even though doing so would be legal.
2319     if (!all_of(Invokes, HasNormalDest))
2320       return false;
2321 
2322     // All normal destinations must be identical.
2323     BasicBlock *NormalBB = nullptr;
2324     for (InvokeInst *II : Invokes) {
2325       BasicBlock *CurrNormalBB = II->getNormalDest();
2326       assert(CurrNormalBB && "There is always a 'continue to' basic block.");
2327       if (!NormalBB)
2328         NormalBB = CurrNormalBB;
2329       else if (NormalBB != CurrNormalBB)
2330         return false;
2331     }
2332 
2333     // In the normal destination, the incoming values for these two `invoke`s
2334     // must be compatible.
2335     SmallPtrSet<Value *, 16> EquivalenceSet(Invokes.begin(), Invokes.end());
2336     if (!IncomingValuesAreCompatible(
2337             NormalBB, {Invokes[0]->getParent(), Invokes[1]->getParent()},
2338             &EquivalenceSet))
2339       return false;
2340   }
2341 
2342 #ifndef NDEBUG
2343   // All unwind destinations must be identical.
2344   // We know that because we have started from said unwind destination.
2345   BasicBlock *UnwindBB = nullptr;
2346   for (InvokeInst *II : Invokes) {
2347     BasicBlock *CurrUnwindBB = II->getUnwindDest();
2348     assert(CurrUnwindBB && "There is always an 'unwind to' basic block.");
2349     if (!UnwindBB)
2350       UnwindBB = CurrUnwindBB;
2351     else
2352       assert(UnwindBB == CurrUnwindBB && "Unexpected unwind destination.");
2353   }
2354 #endif
2355 
2356   // In the unwind destination, the incoming values for these two `invoke`s
2357   // must be compatible.
2358   if (!IncomingValuesAreCompatible(
2359           Invokes.front()->getUnwindDest(),
2360           {Invokes[0]->getParent(), Invokes[1]->getParent()}))
2361     return false;
2362 
2363   // Ignoring arguments, these `invoke`s must be identical,
2364   // including operand bundles.
2365   const InvokeInst *II0 = Invokes.front();
2366   for (auto *II : Invokes.drop_front())
2367     if (!II->isSameOperationAs(II0))
2368       return false;
2369 
2370   // Can we theoretically form the data operands for the merged `invoke`?
2371   auto IsIllegalToMergeArguments = [](auto Ops) {
2372     Type *Ty = std::get<0>(Ops)->getType();
2373     assert(Ty == std::get<1>(Ops)->getType() && "Incompatible types?");
2374     return Ty->isTokenTy() && std::get<0>(Ops) != std::get<1>(Ops);
2375   };
2376   assert(Invokes.size() == 2 && "Always called with exactly two candidates.");
2377   if (any_of(zip(Invokes[0]->data_ops(), Invokes[1]->data_ops()),
2378              IsIllegalToMergeArguments))
2379     return false;
2380 
2381   return true;
2382 }
2383 
2384 } // namespace
2385 
2386 // Merge all invokes in the provided set, all of which are compatible
2387 // as per the `CompatibleSets::shouldBelongToSameSet()`.
2388 static void MergeCompatibleInvokesImpl(ArrayRef<InvokeInst *> Invokes,
2389                                        DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
2390   assert(Invokes.size() >= 2 && "Must have at least two invokes to merge.");
2391 
2392   SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 8> Updates;
2393   if (DTU)
2394     Updates.reserve(2 + 3 * Invokes.size());
2395 
2396   bool HasNormalDest =
2397       !isa<UnreachableInst>(Invokes[0]->getNormalDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
2398 
2399   // Clone one of the invokes into a new basic block.
2400   // Since they are all compatible, it doesn't matter which invoke is cloned.
2401   InvokeInst *MergedInvoke = [&Invokes, HasNormalDest]() {
2402     InvokeInst *II0 = Invokes.front();
2403     BasicBlock *II0BB = II0->getParent();
2404     BasicBlock *InsertBeforeBlock =
2405         II0->getParent()->getIterator()->getNextNode();
2406     Function *Func = II0BB->getParent();
2407     LLVMContext &Ctx = II0->getContext();
2408 
2409     BasicBlock *MergedInvokeBB = BasicBlock::Create(
2410         Ctx, II0BB->getName() + ".invoke", Func, InsertBeforeBlock);
2411 
2412     auto *MergedInvoke = cast<InvokeInst>(II0->clone());
2413     // NOTE: all invokes have the same attributes, so no handling needed.
2414     MergedInvokeBB->getInstList().push_back(MergedInvoke);
2415 
2416     if (!HasNormalDest) {
2417       // This set does not have a normal destination,
2418       // so just form a new block with unreachable terminator.
2419       BasicBlock *MergedNormalDest = BasicBlock::Create(
2420           Ctx, II0BB->getName() + ".cont", Func, InsertBeforeBlock);
2421       new UnreachableInst(Ctx, MergedNormalDest);
2422       MergedInvoke->setNormalDest(MergedNormalDest);
2423     }
2424 
2425     // The unwind destination, however, remainds identical for all invokes here.
2426 
2427     return MergedInvoke;
2428   }();
2429 
2430   if (DTU) {
2431     // Predecessor blocks that contained these invokes will now branch to
2432     // the new block that contains the merged invoke, ...
2433     for (InvokeInst *II : Invokes)
2434       Updates.push_back(
2435           {DominatorTree::Insert, II->getParent(), MergedInvoke->getParent()});
2436 
2437     // ... which has the new `unreachable` block as normal destination,
2438     // or unwinds to the (same for all `invoke`s in this set) `landingpad`,
2439     for (BasicBlock *SuccBBOfMergedInvoke : successors(MergedInvoke))
2440       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, MergedInvoke->getParent(),
2441                          SuccBBOfMergedInvoke});
2442 
2443     // Since predecessor blocks now unconditionally branch to a new block,
2444     // they no longer branch to their original successors.
2445     for (InvokeInst *II : Invokes)
2446       for (BasicBlock *SuccOfPredBB : successors(II->getParent()))
2447         Updates.push_back(
2448             {DominatorTree::Delete, II->getParent(), SuccOfPredBB});
2449   }
2450 
2451   bool IsIndirectCall = Invokes[0]->isIndirectCall();
2452 
2453   // Form the merged operands for the merged invoke.
2454   for (Use &U : MergedInvoke->operands()) {
2455     // Only PHI together the indirect callees and data operands.
2456     if (MergedInvoke->isCallee(&U)) {
2457       if (!IsIndirectCall)
2458         continue;
2459     } else if (!MergedInvoke->isDataOperand(&U))
2460       continue;
2461 
2462     // Don't create trivial PHI's with all-identical incoming values.
2463     bool NeedPHI = any_of(Invokes, [&U](InvokeInst *II) {
2464       return II->getOperand(U.getOperandNo()) != U.get();
2465     });
2466     if (!NeedPHI)
2467       continue;
2468 
2469     // Form a PHI out of all the data ops under this index.
2470     PHINode *PN = PHINode::Create(
2471         U->getType(), /*NumReservedValues=*/Invokes.size(), "", MergedInvoke);
2472     for (InvokeInst *II : Invokes)
2473       PN->addIncoming(II->getOperand(U.getOperandNo()), II->getParent());
2474 
2475     U.set(PN);
2476   }
2477 
2478   // We've ensured that each PHI node has compatible (identical) incoming values
2479   // when coming from each of the `invoke`s in the current merge set,
2480   // so update the PHI nodes accordingly.
2481   for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(MergedInvoke))
2482     AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, /*NewPred=*/MergedInvoke->getParent(),
2483                           /*ExistPred=*/Invokes.front()->getParent());
2484 
2485   // And finally, replace the original `invoke`s with an unconditional branch
2486   // to the block with the merged `invoke`. Also, give that merged `invoke`
2487   // the merged debugloc of all the original `invoke`s.
2488   const DILocation *MergedDebugLoc = nullptr;
2489   for (InvokeInst *II : Invokes) {
2490     // Compute the debug location common to all the original `invoke`s.
2491     if (!MergedDebugLoc)
2492       MergedDebugLoc = II->getDebugLoc();
2493     else
2494       MergedDebugLoc =
2495           DILocation::getMergedLocation(MergedDebugLoc, II->getDebugLoc());
2496 
2497     // And replace the old `invoke` with an unconditionally branch
2498     // to the block with the merged `invoke`.
2499     for (BasicBlock *OrigSuccBB : successors(II->getParent()))
2500       OrigSuccBB->removePredecessor(II->getParent());
2501     BranchInst::Create(MergedInvoke->getParent(), II->getParent());
2502     II->replaceAllUsesWith(MergedInvoke);
2503     II->eraseFromParent();
2504     ++NumInvokesMerged;
2505   }
2506   MergedInvoke->setDebugLoc(MergedDebugLoc);
2507   ++NumInvokeSetsFormed;
2508 
2509   if (DTU)
2510     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
2511 }
2512 
2513 /// If this block is a `landingpad` exception handling block, categorize all
2514 /// the predecessor `invoke`s into sets, with all `invoke`s in each set
2515 /// being "mergeable" together, and then merge invokes in each set together.
2516 ///
2517 /// This is a weird mix of hoisting and sinking. Visually, it goes from:
2518 ///          [...]        [...]
2519 ///            |            |
2520 ///        [invoke0]    [invoke1]
2521 ///           / \          / \
2522 ///     [cont0] [landingpad] [cont1]
2523 /// to:
2524 ///      [...] [...]
2525 ///          \ /
2526 ///       [invoke]
2527 ///          / \
2528 ///     [cont] [landingpad]
2529 ///
2530 /// But of course we can only do that if the invokes share the `landingpad`,
2531 /// edges invoke0->cont0 and invoke1->cont1 are "compatible",
2532 /// and the invoked functions are "compatible".
2533 static bool MergeCompatibleInvokes(BasicBlock *BB, DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
2534   if (!EnableMergeCompatibleInvokes)
2535     return false;
2536 
2537   bool Changed = false;
2538 
2539   // FIXME: generalize to all exception handling blocks?
2540   if (!BB->isLandingPad())
2541     return Changed;
2542 
2543   CompatibleSets Grouper;
2544 
2545   // Record all the predecessors of this `landingpad`. As per verifier,
2546   // the only allowed predecessor is the unwind edge of an `invoke`.
2547   // We want to group "compatible" `invokes` into the same set to be merged.
2548   for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(BB))
2549     Grouper.insert(cast<InvokeInst>(PredBB->getTerminator()));
2550 
2551   // And now, merge `invoke`s that were grouped togeter.
2552   for (ArrayRef<InvokeInst *> Invokes : Grouper.Sets) {
2553     if (Invokes.size() < 2)
2554       continue;
2555     Changed = true;
2556     MergeCompatibleInvokesImpl(Invokes, DTU);
2557   }
2558 
2559   return Changed;
2560 }
2561 
2562 /// Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
2563 /// conditional block.
2564 ///
2565 /// We are looking for code like the following:
2566 ///   BrBB:
2567 ///     store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
2568 ///     ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
2569 ///     ... // function).
2570 ///     %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
2571 ///     br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
2572 ///   ThenBB:
2573 ///     store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
2574 ///     br label EndBB
2575 ///   EndBB:
2576 ///     ...
2577 ///   We are going to transform this into:
2578 ///   BrBB:
2579 ///     store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
2580 ///     ... //
2581 ///     %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
2582 ///     %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
2583 ///     store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
2584 ///     ...
2585 ///
2586 /// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
2587 ///         hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
2588 static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
2589                                      BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
2590   StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
2591   if (!StoreToHoist)
2592     return nullptr;
2593 
2594   // Volatile or atomic.
2595   if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
2596     return nullptr;
2597 
2598   Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
2599   Type *StoreTy = StoreToHoist->getValueOperand()->getType();
2600 
2601   // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
2602   unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 9;
2603   // Skip pseudo probe intrinsic calls which are not really killing any memory
2604   // accesses.
2605   for (Instruction &CurI : reverse(BrBB->instructionsWithoutDebug(true))) {
2606     if (!MaxNumInstToLookAt)
2607       break;
2608     --MaxNumInstToLookAt;
2609 
2610     // Could be calling an instruction that affects memory like free().
2611     if (CurI.mayWriteToMemory() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
2612       return nullptr;
2613 
2614     if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&CurI)) {
2615       // Found the previous store to same location and type. Make sure it is
2616       // simple, to avoid introducing a spurious non-atomic write after an
2617       // atomic write.
2618       if (SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr &&
2619           SI->getValueOperand()->getType() == StoreTy && SI->isSimple())
2620         // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
2621         return SI->getValueOperand();
2622       return nullptr; // Unknown store.
2623     }
2624 
2625     if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(&CurI)) {
2626       if (LI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr && LI->getType() == StoreTy &&
2627           LI->isSimple()) {
2628         // Local objects (created by an `alloca` instruction) are always
2629         // writable, so once we are past a read from a location it is valid to
2630         // also write to that same location.
2631         // If the address of the local object never escapes the function, that
2632         // means it's never concurrently read or written, hence moving the store
2633         // from under the condition will not introduce a data race.
2634         auto *AI = dyn_cast<AllocaInst>(getUnderlyingObject(StorePtr));
2635         if (AI && !PointerMayBeCaptured(AI, false, true))
2636           // Found a previous load, return it.
2637           return LI;
2638       }
2639       // The load didn't work out, but we may still find a store.
2640     }
2641   }
2642 
2643   return nullptr;
2644 }
2645 
2646 /// Estimate the cost of the insertion(s) and check that the PHI nodes can be
2647 /// converted to selects.
2648 static bool validateAndCostRequiredSelects(BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
2649                                            BasicBlock *EndBB,
2650                                            unsigned &SpeculatedInstructions,
2651                                            InstructionCost &Cost,
2652                                            const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
2653   TargetTransformInfo::TargetCostKind CostKind =
2654     BB->getParent()->hasMinSize()
2655     ? TargetTransformInfo::TCK_CodeSize
2656     : TargetTransformInfo::TCK_SizeAndLatency;
2657 
2658   bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
2659   for (PHINode &PN : EndBB->phis()) {
2660     Value *OrigV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2661     Value *ThenV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
2662 
2663     // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
2664     // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
2665     if (ThenV == OrigV)
2666       continue;
2667 
2668     Cost += TTI.getCmpSelInstrCost(Instruction::Select, PN.getType(), nullptr,
2669                                    CmpInst::BAD_ICMP_PREDICATE, CostKind);
2670 
2671     // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
2672     if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, &PN) ||
2673         passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, &PN))
2674       return false;
2675 
2676     HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
2677     ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
2678     ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
2679     if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
2680       continue; // Known cheap (FIXME: Maybe not true for aggregates).
2681 
2682     InstructionCost OrigCost = OrigCE ? computeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
2683     InstructionCost ThenCost = ThenCE ? computeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
2684     InstructionCost MaxCost =
2685         2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
2686     if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
2687       return false;
2688 
2689     // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
2690     // getting expanded into Instructions.
2691     // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
2692     // constant expression.
2693     ++SpeculatedInstructions;
2694     if (SpeculatedInstructions > 1)
2695       return false;
2696   }
2697 
2698   return HaveRewritablePHIs;
2699 }
2700 
2701 /// Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
2702 ///
2703 /// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
2704 /// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
2705 /// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
2706 /// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
2707 /// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
2708 ///
2709 /// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
2710 /// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
2711 /// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
2712 /// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
2713 ///
2714 ///
2715 /// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
2716 /// \code
2717 ///   BB:
2718 ///     %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
2719 ///     br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
2720 ///   ThenBB:
2721 ///     %sub = sub %x, %y
2722 ///     br label BB2
2723 ///   EndBB:
2724 ///     %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
2725 ///     ...
2726 /// \endcode
2727 ///
2728 /// Into this IR:
2729 /// \code
2730 ///   BB:
2731 ///     %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
2732 ///     %sub = sub %x, %y
2733 ///     %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
2734 ///     ...
2735 /// \endcode
2736 ///
2737 /// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
2738 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
2739                                             const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
2740   // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
2741   Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
2742   if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
2743     return false;
2744 
2745   BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
2746   BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
2747   InstructionCost Budget =
2748       PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
2749 
2750   // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
2751   // to swap the select operands later.
2752   bool Invert = false;
2753   if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
2754     assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
2755     Invert = true;
2756   }
2757   assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
2758 
2759   // If the branch is non-unpredictable, and is predicted to *not* branch to
2760   // the `then` block, then avoid speculating it.
2761   if (!BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_unpredictable)) {
2762     uint64_t TWeight, FWeight;
2763     if (BI->extractProfMetadata(TWeight, FWeight) && (TWeight + FWeight) != 0) {
2764       uint64_t EndWeight = Invert ? TWeight : FWeight;
2765       BranchProbability BIEndProb =
2766           BranchProbability::getBranchProbability(EndWeight, TWeight + FWeight);
2767       BranchProbability Likely = TTI.getPredictableBranchThreshold();
2768       if (BIEndProb >= Likely)
2769         return false;
2770     }
2771   }
2772 
2773   // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within ThenBB when
2774   // they are candidates for sinking into ThenBB. Specifically:
2775   // - They are defined in BB, and
2776   // - They have no side effects, and
2777   // - All of their uses are in ThenBB.
2778   SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
2779 
2780   SmallVector<Instruction *, 4> SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics;
2781 
2782   unsigned SpeculatedInstructions = 0;
2783   Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
2784   StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
2785   for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
2786                             BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
2787        BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
2788     Instruction *I = &*BBI;
2789     // Skip debug info.
2790     if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
2791       SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics.push_back(I);
2792       continue;
2793     }
2794 
2795     // Skip pseudo probes. The consequence is we lose track of the branch
2796     // probability for ThenBB, which is fine since the optimization here takes
2797     // place regardless of the branch probability.
2798     if (isa<PseudoProbeInst>(I)) {
2799       // The probe should be deleted so that it will not be over-counted when
2800       // the samples collected on the non-conditional path are counted towards
2801       // the conditional path. We leave it for the counts inference algorithm to
2802       // figure out a proper count for an unknown probe.
2803       SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics.push_back(I);
2804       continue;
2805     }
2806 
2807     // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
2808     // terminator) for now.
2809     ++SpeculatedInstructions;
2810     if (SpeculatedInstructions > 1)
2811       return false;
2812 
2813     // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
2814     if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
2815         !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
2816                                   I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
2817       return false;
2818     if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
2819         computeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
2820             PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
2821       return false;
2822 
2823     // Store the store speculation candidate.
2824     if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
2825       SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
2826 
2827     // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
2828     // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
2829     // being sunk into the use block.
2830     for (Use &Op : I->operands()) {
2831       Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Op);
2832       if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
2833         continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
2834 
2835       ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
2836     }
2837   }
2838 
2839   // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in ThenBB as costs for
2840   // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
2841   // and so iteration order isn't significant.
2842   for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator
2843            I = SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(),
2844            E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
2845        I != E; ++I)
2846     if (I->first->hasNUses(I->second)) {
2847       ++SpeculatedInstructions;
2848       if (SpeculatedInstructions > 1)
2849         return false;
2850     }
2851 
2852   // Check that we can insert the selects and that it's not too expensive to do
2853   // so.
2854   bool Convert = SpeculatedStore != nullptr;
2855   InstructionCost Cost = 0;
2856   Convert |= validateAndCostRequiredSelects(BB, ThenBB, EndBB,
2857                                             SpeculatedInstructions,
2858                                             Cost, TTI);
2859   if (!Convert || Cost > Budget)
2860     return false;
2861 
2862   // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
2863   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
2864 
2865   // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
2866   if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
2867     IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
2868     Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
2869     Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
2870     if (Invert)
2871       std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
2872     Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(
2873         BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, "spec.store.select", BI);
2874     SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
2875     SpeculatedStore->applyMergedLocation(BI->getDebugLoc(),
2876                                          SpeculatedStore->getDebugLoc());
2877   }
2878 
2879   // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
2880   // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction. Drop the debug loc
2881   // to avoid making it appear as if the condition is a constant, which would
2882   // be misleading while debugging.
2883   // Similarly strip attributes that maybe dependent on condition we are
2884   // hoisting above.
2885   for (auto &I : *ThenBB) {
2886     if (!SpeculatedStoreValue || &I != SpeculatedStore)
2887       I.setDebugLoc(DebugLoc());
2888     I.dropUndefImplyingAttrsAndUnknownMetadata();
2889   }
2890 
2891   // Hoist the instructions.
2892   BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
2893                            ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
2894 
2895   // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
2896   IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
2897   for (PHINode &PN : EndBB->phis()) {
2898     unsigned OrigI = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
2899     unsigned ThenI = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
2900     Value *OrigV = PN.getIncomingValue(OrigI);
2901     Value *ThenV = PN.getIncomingValue(ThenI);
2902 
2903     // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
2904     if (OrigV == ThenV)
2905       continue;
2906 
2907     // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
2908     // false value is the pre-existing value. Swap them if the branch
2909     // destinations were inverted.
2910     Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
2911     if (Invert)
2912       std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
2913     Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, "spec.select", BI);
2914     PN.setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
2915     PN.setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
2916   }
2917 
2918   // Remove speculated dbg intrinsics.
2919   // FIXME: Is it possible to do this in a more elegant way? Moving/merging the
2920   // dbg value for the different flows and inserting it after the select.
2921   for (Instruction *I : SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics)
2922     I->eraseFromParent();
2923 
2924   ++NumSpeculations;
2925   return true;
2926 }
2927 
2928 /// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
2929 static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
2930   int Size = 0;
2931 
2932   SmallPtrSet<const Value *, 32> EphValues;
2933   auto IsEphemeral = [&](const Instruction *I) {
2934     if (isa<AssumeInst>(I))
2935       return true;
2936     return !I->mayHaveSideEffects() && !I->isTerminator() &&
2937            all_of(I->users(),
2938                   [&](const User *U) { return EphValues.count(U); });
2939   };
2940 
2941   // Walk the loop in reverse so that we can identify ephemeral values properly
2942   // (values only feeding assumes).
2943   for (Instruction &I : reverse(BB->instructionsWithoutDebug(false))) {
2944     // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
2945     if (CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I))
2946       if (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent())
2947         return false;
2948 
2949     // Ignore ephemeral values which are deleted during codegen.
2950     if (IsEphemeral(&I))
2951       EphValues.insert(&I);
2952     // We will delete Phis while threading, so Phis should not be accounted in
2953     // block's size.
2954     else if (!isa<PHINode>(I)) {
2955       if (Size++ > MaxSmallBlockSize)
2956         return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
2957     }
2958 
2959     // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
2960     // live outside of the current basic block.
2961     for (User *U : I.users()) {
2962       Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
2963       if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI))
2964         return false;
2965     }
2966 
2967     // Looks ok, continue checking.
2968   }
2969 
2970   return true;
2971 }
2972 
2973 static ConstantInt *getKnownValueOnEdge(Value *V, BasicBlock *From,
2974                                         BasicBlock *To) {
2975   // Don't look past the block defining the value, we might get the value from
2976   // a previous loop iteration.
2977   auto *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
2978   if (I && I->getParent() == To)
2979     return nullptr;
2980 
2981   // We know the value if the From block branches on it.
2982   auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(From->getTerminator());
2983   if (BI && BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition() == V &&
2984       BI->getSuccessor(0) != BI->getSuccessor(1))
2985     return BI->getSuccessor(0) == To ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BI->getContext())
2986                                      : ConstantInt::getFalse(BI->getContext());
2987 
2988   return nullptr;
2989 }
2990 
2991 /// If we have a conditional branch on something for which we know the constant
2992 /// value in predecessors (e.g. a phi node in the current block), thread edges
2993 /// from the predecessor to their ultimate destination.
2994 static Optional<bool>
2995 FoldCondBranchOnValueKnownInPredecessorImpl(BranchInst *BI, DomTreeUpdater *DTU,
2996                                             const DataLayout &DL,
2997                                             AssumptionCache *AC) {
2998   SmallMapVector<ConstantInt *, SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 2>, 2> KnownValues;
2999   BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
3000   Value *Cond = BI->getCondition();
3001   PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(Cond);
3002   if (PN && PN->getParent() == BB) {
3003     // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
3004     if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
3005       FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
3006       return true;
3007     }
3008 
3009     for (Use &U : PN->incoming_values())
3010       if (auto *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(U))
3011         KnownValues[CB].insert(PN->getIncomingBlock(U));
3012   } else {
3013     for (BasicBlock *Pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3014       if (ConstantInt *CB = getKnownValueOnEdge(Cond, Pred, BB))
3015         KnownValues[CB].insert(Pred);
3016     }
3017   }
3018 
3019   if (KnownValues.empty())
3020     return false;
3021 
3022   // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
3023   // Check that the block is small enough and values defined in the block are
3024   // not used outside of it.
3025   if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB))
3026     return false;
3027 
3028   for (const auto &Pair : KnownValues) {
3029     // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
3030     // branch to RealDest.
3031     ConstantInt *CB = Pair.first;
3032     ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> PredBBs = Pair.second.getArrayRef();
3033     BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
3034 
3035     if (RealDest == BB)
3036       continue; // Skip self loops.
3037 
3038     // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
3039     if (any_of(PredBBs, [](BasicBlock *PredBB) {
3040           return isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator());
3041         }))
3042       continue;
3043 
3044     LLVM_DEBUG({
3045       dbgs() << "Condition " << *Cond << " in " << BB->getName()
3046              << " has value " << *Pair.first << " in predecessors:\n";
3047       for (const BasicBlock *PredBB : Pair.second)
3048         dbgs() << "  " << PredBB->getName() << "\n";
3049       dbgs() << "Threading to destination " << RealDest->getName() << ".\n";
3050     });
3051 
3052     // Split the predecessors we are threading into a new edge block. We'll
3053     // clone the instructions into this block, and then redirect it to RealDest.
3054     BasicBlock *EdgeBB = SplitBlockPredecessors(BB, PredBBs, ".critedge", DTU);
3055 
3056     // TODO: These just exist to reduce test diff, we can drop them if we like.
3057     EdgeBB->setName(RealDest->getName() + ".critedge");
3058     EdgeBB->moveBefore(RealDest);
3059 
3060     // Update PHI nodes.
3061     AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
3062 
3063     // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over.  Clone these
3064     // instructions into EdgeBB.  We know that there will be no uses of the
3065     // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
3066     BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
3067     DenseMap<Value *, Value *> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
3068     TranslateMap[Cond] = CB;
3069     for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
3070       if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
3071         TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(EdgeBB);
3072         continue;
3073       }
3074       // Clone the instruction.
3075       Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
3076       if (BBI->hasName())
3077         N->setName(BBI->getName() + ".c");
3078 
3079       // Update operands due to translation.
3080       for (Use &Op : N->operands()) {
3081         DenseMap<Value *, Value *>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(Op);
3082         if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
3083           Op = PI->second;
3084       }
3085 
3086       // Check for trivial simplification.
3087       if (Value *V = simplifyInstruction(N, {DL, nullptr, nullptr, AC})) {
3088         if (!BBI->use_empty())
3089           TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
3090         if (!N->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
3091           N->deleteValue(); // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
3092           N = nullptr;
3093         }
3094       } else {
3095         if (!BBI->use_empty())
3096           TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
3097       }
3098       if (N) {
3099         // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
3100         EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
3101 
3102         // Register the new instruction with the assumption cache if necessary.
3103         if (auto *Assume = dyn_cast<AssumeInst>(N))
3104           if (AC)
3105             AC->registerAssumption(Assume);
3106       }
3107     }
3108 
3109     BB->removePredecessor(EdgeBB);
3110     BranchInst *EdgeBI = cast<BranchInst>(EdgeBB->getTerminator());
3111     EdgeBI->setSuccessor(0, RealDest);
3112     EdgeBI->setDebugLoc(BI->getDebugLoc());
3113 
3114     if (DTU) {
3115       SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 2> Updates;
3116       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, EdgeBB, BB});
3117       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, EdgeBB, RealDest});
3118       DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
3119     }
3120 
3121     // For simplicity, we created a separate basic block for the edge. Merge
3122     // it back into the predecessor if possible. This not only avoids
3123     // unnecessary SimplifyCFG iterations, but also makes sure that we don't
3124     // bypass the check for trivial cycles above.
3125     MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(EdgeBB, DTU);
3126 
3127     // Signal repeat, simplifying any other constants.
3128     return None;
3129   }
3130 
3131   return false;
3132 }
3133 
3134 static bool FoldCondBranchOnValueKnownInPredecessor(BranchInst *BI,
3135                                                     DomTreeUpdater *DTU,
3136                                                     const DataLayout &DL,
3137                                                     AssumptionCache *AC) {
3138   Optional<bool> Result;
3139   bool EverChanged = false;
3140   do {
3141     // Note that None means "we changed things, but recurse further."
3142     Result = FoldCondBranchOnValueKnownInPredecessorImpl(BI, DTU, DL, AC);
3143     EverChanged |= Result == None || *Result;
3144   } while (Result == None);
3145   return EverChanged;
3146 }
3147 
3148 /// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
3149 /// see if we can eliminate it.
3150 static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
3151                                 DomTreeUpdater *DTU, const DataLayout &DL) {
3152   // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node.  Check to see if this is a simple "if
3153   // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure.  Basically, we
3154   // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
3155   // subsequently causes this merge to happen.  We really want control
3156   // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
3157   // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
3158   BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
3159 
3160   BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
3161   BranchInst *DomBI = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
3162   if (!DomBI)
3163     return false;
3164   Value *IfCond = DomBI->getCondition();
3165   // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
3166   if (isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
3167     return false;
3168 
3169   BasicBlock *DomBlock = DomBI->getParent();
3170   SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 2> IfBlocks;
3171   llvm::copy_if(
3172       PN->blocks(), std::back_inserter(IfBlocks), [](BasicBlock *IfBlock) {
3173         return cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock->getTerminator())->isUnconditional();
3174       });
3175   assert((IfBlocks.size() == 1 || IfBlocks.size() == 2) &&
3176          "Will have either one or two blocks to speculate.");
3177 
3178   // If the branch is non-unpredictable, see if we either predictably jump to
3179   // the merge bb (if we have only a single 'then' block), or if we predictably
3180   // jump to one specific 'then' block (if we have two of them).
3181   // It isn't beneficial to speculatively execute the code
3182   // from the block that we know is predictably not entered.
3183   if (!DomBI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_unpredictable)) {
3184     uint64_t TWeight, FWeight;
3185     if (DomBI->extractProfMetadata(TWeight, FWeight) &&
3186         (TWeight + FWeight) != 0) {
3187       BranchProbability BITrueProb =
3188           BranchProbability::getBranchProbability(TWeight, TWeight + FWeight);
3189       BranchProbability Likely = TTI.getPredictableBranchThreshold();
3190       BranchProbability BIFalseProb = BITrueProb.getCompl();
3191       if (IfBlocks.size() == 1) {
3192         BranchProbability BIBBProb =
3193             DomBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BITrueProb : BIFalseProb;
3194         if (BIBBProb >= Likely)
3195           return false;
3196       } else {
3197         if (BITrueProb >= Likely || BIFalseProb >= Likely)
3198           return false;
3199       }
3200     }
3201   }
3202 
3203   // Don't try to fold an unreachable block. For example, the phi node itself
3204   // can't be the candidate if-condition for a select that we want to form.
3205   if (auto *IfCondPhiInst = dyn_cast<PHINode>(IfCond))
3206     if (IfCondPhiInst->getParent() == BB)
3207       return false;
3208 
3209   // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
3210   // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
3211   // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
3212   // doesn't support cmov's).  Only do this transformation if there are two or
3213   // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
3214   unsigned NumPhis = 0;
3215   for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
3216     if (NumPhis > 2)
3217       return false;
3218 
3219   // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
3220   // instructions.  While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
3221   // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
3222   SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> AggressiveInsts;
3223   InstructionCost Cost = 0;
3224   InstructionCost Budget =
3225       TwoEntryPHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
3226 
3227   bool Changed = false;
3228   for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
3229     PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
3230     if (Value *V = simplifyInstruction(PN, {DL, PN})) {
3231       PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
3232       PN->eraseFromParent();
3233       Changed = true;
3234       continue;
3235     }
3236 
3237     if (!dominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, AggressiveInsts,
3238                              Cost, Budget, TTI) ||
3239         !dominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, AggressiveInsts,
3240                              Cost, Budget, TTI))
3241       return Changed;
3242   }
3243 
3244   // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point.  Refresh it.  If
3245   // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
3246   PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
3247   if (!PN)
3248     return true;
3249 
3250   // Return true if at least one of these is a 'not', and another is either
3251   // a 'not' too, or a constant.
3252   auto CanHoistNotFromBothValues = [](Value *V0, Value *V1) {
3253     if (!match(V0, m_Not(m_Value())))
3254       std::swap(V0, V1);
3255     auto Invertible = m_CombineOr(m_Not(m_Value()), m_AnyIntegralConstant());
3256     return match(V0, m_Not(m_Value())) && match(V1, Invertible);
3257   };
3258 
3259   // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators or
3260   // (possibly inverted) select form of or/ands,  unless one of
3261   // the incoming values is an 'not' and another one is freely invertible.
3262   // These can often be turned into switches and other things.
3263   auto IsBinOpOrAnd = [](Value *V) {
3264     return match(
3265         V, m_CombineOr(
3266                m_BinOp(),
3267                m_CombineOr(m_Select(m_Value(), m_ImmConstant(), m_Value()),
3268                            m_Select(m_Value(), m_Value(), m_ImmConstant()))));
3269   };
3270   if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
3271       (IsBinOpOrAnd(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
3272        IsBinOpOrAnd(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) || IsBinOpOrAnd(IfCond)) &&
3273       !CanHoistNotFromBothValues(PN->getIncomingValue(0),
3274                                  PN->getIncomingValue(1)))
3275     return Changed;
3276 
3277   // If all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all instructions
3278   // in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If not, we won't be able
3279   // to get rid of the control flow, so it's not worth promoting to select
3280   // instructions.
3281   for (BasicBlock *IfBlock : IfBlocks)
3282     for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock->begin(); !I->isTerminator(); ++I)
3283       if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !I->isDebugOrPseudoInst()) {
3284         // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
3285         // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
3286         // the xform is not worth it.
3287         return Changed;
3288       }
3289 
3290   // If either of the blocks has it's address taken, we can't do this fold.
3291   if (any_of(IfBlocks,
3292              [](BasicBlock *IfBlock) { return IfBlock->hasAddressTaken(); }))
3293     return Changed;
3294 
3295   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION!  " << *IfCond
3296                     << "  T: " << IfTrue->getName()
3297                     << "  F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
3298 
3299   // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
3300   // do all of the PHI's now.
3301 
3302   // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
3303   // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
3304   for (BasicBlock *IfBlock : IfBlocks)
3305       hoistAllInstructionsInto(DomBlock, DomBI, IfBlock);
3306 
3307   IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(DomBI);
3308   // Propagate fast-math-flags from phi nodes to replacement selects.
3309   IRBuilder<>::FastMathFlagGuard FMFGuard(Builder);
3310   while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
3311     if (isa<FPMathOperator>(PN))
3312       Builder.setFastMathFlags(PN->getFastMathFlags());
3313 
3314     // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
3315     Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(IfTrue);
3316     Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(IfFalse);
3317 
3318     Value *Sel = Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "", DomBI);
3319     PN->replaceAllUsesWith(Sel);
3320     Sel->takeName(PN);
3321     PN->eraseFromParent();
3322   }
3323 
3324   // At this point, all IfBlocks are empty, so our if statement
3325   // has been flattened.  Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
3326   // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
3327   Builder.CreateBr(BB);
3328 
3329   SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 3> Updates;
3330   if (DTU) {
3331     Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, DomBlock, BB});
3332     for (auto *Successor : successors(DomBlock))
3333       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, DomBlock, Successor});
3334   }
3335 
3336   DomBI->eraseFromParent();
3337   if (DTU)
3338     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
3339 
3340   return true;
3341 }
3342 
3343 static Value *createLogicalOp(IRBuilderBase &Builder,
3344                               Instruction::BinaryOps Opc, Value *LHS,
3345                               Value *RHS, const Twine &Name = "") {
3346   // Try to relax logical op to binary op.
3347   if (impliesPoison(RHS, LHS))
3348     return Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, LHS, RHS, Name);
3349   if (Opc == Instruction::And)
3350     return Builder.CreateLogicalAnd(LHS, RHS, Name);
3351   if (Opc == Instruction::Or)
3352     return Builder.CreateLogicalOr(LHS, RHS, Name);
3353   llvm_unreachable("Invalid logical opcode");
3354 }
3355 
3356 /// Return true if either PBI or BI has branch weight available, and store
3357 /// the weights in {Pred|Succ}{True|False}Weight. If one of PBI and BI does
3358 /// not have branch weight, use 1:1 as its weight.
3359 static bool extractPredSuccWeights(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
3360                                    uint64_t &PredTrueWeight,
3361                                    uint64_t &PredFalseWeight,
3362                                    uint64_t &SuccTrueWeight,
3363                                    uint64_t &SuccFalseWeight) {
3364   bool PredHasWeights =
3365       PBI->extractProfMetadata(PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
3366   bool SuccHasWeights =
3367       BI->extractProfMetadata(SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
3368   if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
3369     if (!PredHasWeights)
3370       PredTrueWeight = PredFalseWeight = 1;
3371     if (!SuccHasWeights)
3372       SuccTrueWeight = SuccFalseWeight = 1;
3373     return true;
3374   } else {
3375     return false;
3376   }
3377 }
3378 
3379 /// Determine if the two branches share a common destination and deduce a glue
3380 /// that joins the branches' conditions to arrive at the common destination if
3381 /// that would be profitable.
3382 static Optional<std::pair<Instruction::BinaryOps, bool>>
3383 shouldFoldCondBranchesToCommonDestination(BranchInst *BI, BranchInst *PBI,
3384                                           const TargetTransformInfo *TTI) {
3385   assert(BI && PBI && BI->isConditional() && PBI->isConditional() &&
3386          "Both blocks must end with a conditional branches.");
3387   assert(is_contained(predecessors(BI->getParent()), PBI->getParent()) &&
3388          "PredBB must be a predecessor of BB.");
3389 
3390   // We have the potential to fold the conditions together, but if the
3391   // predecessor branch is predictable, we may not want to merge them.
3392   uint64_t PTWeight, PFWeight;
3393   BranchProbability PBITrueProb, Likely;
3394   if (TTI && !PBI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_unpredictable) &&
3395       PBI->extractProfMetadata(PTWeight, PFWeight) &&
3396       (PTWeight + PFWeight) != 0) {
3397     PBITrueProb =
3398         BranchProbability::getBranchProbability(PTWeight, PTWeight + PFWeight);
3399     Likely = TTI->getPredictableBranchThreshold();
3400   }
3401 
3402   if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3403     // Speculate the 2nd condition unless the 1st is probably true.
3404     if (PBITrueProb.isUnknown() || PBITrueProb < Likely)
3405       return {{Instruction::Or, false}};
3406   } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3407     // Speculate the 2nd condition unless the 1st is probably false.
3408     if (PBITrueProb.isUnknown() || PBITrueProb.getCompl() < Likely)
3409       return {{Instruction::And, false}};
3410   } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3411     // Speculate the 2nd condition unless the 1st is probably true.
3412     if (PBITrueProb.isUnknown() || PBITrueProb < Likely)
3413       return {{Instruction::And, true}};
3414   } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3415     // Speculate the 2nd condition unless the 1st is probably false.
3416     if (PBITrueProb.isUnknown() || PBITrueProb.getCompl() < Likely)
3417       return {{Instruction::Or, true}};
3418   }
3419   return None;
3420 }
3421 
3422 static bool performBranchToCommonDestFolding(BranchInst *BI, BranchInst *PBI,
3423                                              DomTreeUpdater *DTU,
3424                                              MemorySSAUpdater *MSSAU,
3425                                              const TargetTransformInfo *TTI) {
3426   BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
3427   BasicBlock *PredBlock = PBI->getParent();
3428 
3429   // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
3430   Instruction::BinaryOps Opc;
3431   bool InvertPredCond;
3432   std::tie(Opc, InvertPredCond) =
3433       *shouldFoldCondBranchesToCommonDestination(BI, PBI, TTI);
3434 
3435   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
3436 
3437   IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
3438   // The builder is used to create instructions to eliminate the branch in BB.
3439   // If BB's terminator has !annotation metadata, add it to the new
3440   // instructions.
3441   Builder.CollectMetadataToCopy(BB->getTerminator(),
3442                                 {LLVMContext::MD_annotation});
3443 
3444   // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
3445   if (InvertPredCond) {
3446     Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
3447     if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
3448       CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
3449       CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
3450     } else {
3451       NewCond =
3452           Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, PBI->getCondition()->getName() + ".not");
3453     }
3454 
3455     PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
3456     PBI->swapSuccessors();
3457   }
3458 
3459   BasicBlock *UniqueSucc =
3460       PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(0) : BI->getSuccessor(1);
3461 
3462   // Before cloning instructions, notify the successor basic block that it
3463   // is about to have a new predecessor. This will update PHI nodes,
3464   // which will allow us to update live-out uses of bonus instructions.
3465   AddPredecessorToBlock(UniqueSucc, PredBlock, BB, MSSAU);
3466 
3467   // Try to update branch weights.
3468   uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
3469   if (extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
3470                              SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight)) {
3471     SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
3472 
3473     if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
3474       // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
3475       // BI:  br i1 %y, UniqueSucc, FalseDest
3476       // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
3477       NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
3478       // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
3479       //               TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
3480       // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
3481       // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
3482       NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight *
3483                                (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
3484                            PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
3485     } else {
3486       // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
3487       // BI:  br i1 %y, TrueDest, UniqueSucc
3488       // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
3489       //              FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
3490       NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
3491                            PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
3492       // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
3493       NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
3494     }
3495 
3496     // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
3497     FitWeights(NewWeights);
3498 
3499     SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(), NewWeights.end());
3500     setBranchWeights(PBI, MDWeights[0], MDWeights[1]);
3501 
3502     // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
3503     // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
3504   } else
3505     PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
3506 
3507   // Now, update the CFG.
3508   PBI->setSuccessor(PBI->getSuccessor(0) != BB, UniqueSucc);
3509 
3510   if (DTU)
3511     DTU->applyUpdates({{DominatorTree::Insert, PredBlock, UniqueSucc},
3512                        {DominatorTree::Delete, PredBlock, BB}});
3513 
3514   // If BI was a loop latch, it may have had associated loop metadata.
3515   // We need to copy it to the new latch, that is, PBI.
3516   if (MDNode *LoopMD = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop))
3517     PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop, LoopMD);
3518 
3519   ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
3520   CloneInstructionsIntoPredecessorBlockAndUpdateSSAUses(BB, PredBlock, VMap);
3521 
3522   // Now that the Cond was cloned into the predecessor basic block,
3523   // or/and the two conditions together.
3524   Value *BICond = VMap[BI->getCondition()];
3525   PBI->setCondition(
3526       createLogicalOp(Builder, Opc, PBI->getCondition(), BICond, "or.cond"));
3527 
3528   // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
3529   for (Instruction &I : *BB) {
3530     if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3531       Instruction *NewI = I.clone();
3532       RemapInstruction(NewI, VMap,
3533                        RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
3534       NewI->insertBefore(PBI);
3535     }
3536   }
3537 
3538   ++NumFoldBranchToCommonDest;
3539   return true;
3540 }
3541 
3542 /// Return if an instruction's type or any of its operands' types are a vector
3543 /// type.
3544 static bool isVectorOp(Instruction &I) {
3545   return I.getType()->isVectorTy() || any_of(I.operands(), [](Use &U) {
3546            return U->getType()->isVectorTy();
3547          });
3548 }
3549 
3550 /// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
3551 /// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
3552 /// logical operations to pick the right destination.
3553 bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, DomTreeUpdater *DTU,
3554                                   MemorySSAUpdater *MSSAU,
3555                                   const TargetTransformInfo *TTI,
3556                                   unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
3557   // If this block ends with an unconditional branch,
3558   // let SpeculativelyExecuteBB() deal with it.
3559   if (!BI->isConditional())
3560     return false;
3561 
3562   BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
3563   TargetTransformInfo::TargetCostKind CostKind =
3564     BB->getParent()->hasMinSize() ? TargetTransformInfo::TCK_CodeSize
3565                                   : TargetTransformInfo::TCK_SizeAndLatency;
3566 
3567   Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
3568 
3569   if (!Cond ||
3570       (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond) &&
3571        !isa<SelectInst>(Cond)) ||
3572       Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
3573     return false;
3574 
3575   // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
3576   if (is_contained(successors(BB), BB))
3577     return false;
3578 
3579   // With which predecessors will we want to deal with?
3580   SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds;
3581   for (BasicBlock *PredBlock : predecessors(BB)) {
3582     BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
3583 
3584     // Check that we have two conditional branches.  If there is a PHI node in
3585     // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
3586     // blocks.
3587     if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() || !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI))
3588       continue;
3589 
3590     // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
3591     Instruction::BinaryOps Opc;
3592     bool InvertPredCond;
3593     if (auto Recipe = shouldFoldCondBranchesToCommonDestination(BI, PBI, TTI))
3594       std::tie(Opc, InvertPredCond) = *Recipe;
3595     else
3596       continue;
3597 
3598     // Check the cost of inserting the necessary logic before performing the
3599     // transformation.
3600     if (TTI) {
3601       Type *Ty = BI->getCondition()->getType();
3602       InstructionCost Cost = TTI->getArithmeticInstrCost(Opc, Ty, CostKind);
3603       if (InvertPredCond && (!PBI->getCondition()->hasOneUse() ||
3604           !isa<CmpInst>(PBI->getCondition())))
3605         Cost += TTI->getArithmeticInstrCost(Instruction::Xor, Ty, CostKind);
3606 
3607       if (Cost > BranchFoldThreshold)
3608         continue;
3609     }
3610 
3611     // Ok, we do want to deal with this predecessor. Record it.
3612     Preds.emplace_back(PredBlock);
3613   }
3614 
3615   // If there aren't any predecessors into which we can fold,
3616   // don't bother checking the cost.
3617   if (Preds.empty())
3618     return false;
3619 
3620   // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
3621   // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
3622   // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
3623   // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
3624   // number of the bonus instructions we'll need to create when cloning into
3625   // each predecessor does not exceed a certain threshold.
3626   unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
3627   bool SawVectorOp = false;
3628   const unsigned PredCount = Preds.size();
3629   for (Instruction &I : *BB) {
3630     // Don't check the branch condition comparison itself.
3631     if (&I == Cond)
3632       continue;
3633     // Ignore dbg intrinsics, and the terminator.
3634     if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) || isa<BranchInst>(I))
3635       continue;
3636     // I must be safe to execute unconditionally.
3637     if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&I))
3638       return false;
3639     SawVectorOp |= isVectorOp(I);
3640 
3641     // Account for the cost of duplicating this instruction into each
3642     // predecessor. Ignore free instructions.
3643     if (!TTI ||
3644         TTI->getUserCost(&I, CostKind) != TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Free) {
3645       NumBonusInsts += PredCount;
3646 
3647       // Early exits once we reach the limit.
3648       if (NumBonusInsts >
3649           BonusInstThreshold * BranchFoldToCommonDestVectorMultiplier)
3650         return false;
3651     }
3652 
3653     auto IsBCSSAUse = [BB, &I](Use &U) {
3654       auto *UI = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser());
3655       if (auto *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(UI))
3656         return PN->getIncomingBlock(U) == BB;
3657       return UI->getParent() == BB && I.comesBefore(UI);
3658     };
3659 
3660     // Does this instruction require rewriting of uses?
3661     if (!all_of(I.uses(), IsBCSSAUse))
3662       return false;
3663   }
3664   if (NumBonusInsts >
3665       BonusInstThreshold *
3666           (SawVectorOp ? BranchFoldToCommonDestVectorMultiplier : 1))
3667     return false;
3668 
3669   // Ok, we have the budget. Perform the transformation.
3670   for (BasicBlock *PredBlock : Preds) {
3671     auto *PBI = cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
3672     return performBranchToCommonDestFolding(BI, PBI, DTU, MSSAU, TTI);
3673   }
3674   return false;
3675 }
3676 
3677 // If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
3678 // nullptr.
3679 static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
3680   StoreInst *S = nullptr;
3681   for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
3682     if (!BB)
3683       continue;
3684     for (auto &I : *BB)
3685       if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
3686         if (S)
3687           // Multiple stores seen.
3688           return nullptr;
3689         else
3690           S = SI;
3691       }
3692   }
3693   return S;
3694 }
3695 
3696 static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
3697                                               Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
3698   // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
3699   // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
3700   //
3701   // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
3702   // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
3703   // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
3704   // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
3705   // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
3706   // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
3707   // one.
3708   //
3709   // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
3710   // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
3711   // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
3712   PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
3713   BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
3714 
3715   for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
3716     if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
3717       PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
3718       if (!AlternativeV)
3719         break;
3720 
3721       assert(Succ->hasNPredecessors(2));
3722       auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
3723       BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
3724       if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
3725         break;
3726       PHI = nullptr;
3727     }
3728   if (PHI)
3729     return PHI;
3730 
3731   // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
3732   if (!AlternativeV &&
3733       (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
3734     return V;
3735 
3736   PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
3737   PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
3738   for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
3739     if (PredBB != BB)
3740       PHI->addIncoming(
3741           AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()), PredBB);
3742   return PHI;
3743 }
3744 
3745 static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
3746     BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB, BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
3747     BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address, bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond,
3748     DomTreeUpdater *DTU, const DataLayout &DL, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
3749   // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
3750   // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
3751   // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
3752   // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
3753   // testing.
3754   StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
3755   StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
3756   if (!PStore || !QStore)
3757     return false;
3758 
3759   // Now check the stores are compatible.
3760   if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered() ||
3761       PStore->getValueOperand()->getType() !=
3762           QStore->getValueOperand()->getType())
3763     return false;
3764 
3765   // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
3766   // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
3767   // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
3768   // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
3769   // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
3770   // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
3771   // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
3772   //
3773   // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
3774   // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
3775   // check there are no other memory operations at all.
3776   for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
3777     if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
3778       return false;
3779   for (auto &I : *QFB)
3780     if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
3781       return false;
3782   if (QTB)
3783     for (auto &I : *QTB)
3784       if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
3785         return false;
3786   for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
3787        I != E; ++I)
3788     if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
3789       return false;
3790 
3791   // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
3792   // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
3793   auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB, ArrayRef<StoreInst *> FreeStores) {
3794     if (!BB)
3795       return true;
3796     // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
3797     // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
3798     // thread this store.
3799     InstructionCost Cost = 0;
3800     InstructionCost Budget =
3801         PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
3802     for (auto &I : BB->instructionsWithoutDebug(false)) {
3803       // Consider terminator instruction to be free.
3804       if (I.isTerminator())
3805         continue;
3806       // If this is one the stores that we want to speculate out of this BB,
3807       // then don't count it's cost, consider it to be free.
3808       if (auto *S = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3809         if (llvm::find(FreeStores, S))
3810           continue;
3811       // Else, we have a white-list of instructions that we are ak speculating.
3812       if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(I) && !isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I))
3813         return false; // Not in white-list - not worthwhile folding.
3814       // And finally, if this is a non-free instruction that we are okay
3815       // speculating, ensure that we consider the speculation budget.
3816       Cost += TTI.getUserCost(&I, TargetTransformInfo::TCK_SizeAndLatency);
3817       if (Cost > Budget)
3818         return false; // Eagerly refuse to fold as soon as we're out of budget.
3819     }
3820     assert(Cost <= Budget &&
3821            "When we run out of budget we will eagerly return from within the "
3822            "per-instruction loop.");
3823     return true;
3824   };
3825 
3826   const std::array<StoreInst *, 2> FreeStores = {PStore, QStore};
3827   if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively &&
3828       (!IsWorthwhile(PTB, FreeStores) || !IsWorthwhile(PFB, FreeStores) ||
3829        !IsWorthwhile(QTB, FreeStores) || !IsWorthwhile(QFB, FreeStores)))
3830     return false;
3831 
3832   // If PostBB has more than two predecessors, we need to split it so we can
3833   // sink the store.
3834   if (std::next(pred_begin(PostBB), 2) != pred_end(PostBB)) {
3835     // We know that QFB's only successor is PostBB. And QFB has a single
3836     // predecessor. If QTB exists, then its only successor is also PostBB.
3837     // If QTB does not exist, then QFB's only predecessor has a conditional
3838     // branch to QFB and PostBB.
3839     BasicBlock *TruePred = QTB ? QTB : QFB->getSinglePredecessor();
3840     BasicBlock *NewBB =
3841         SplitBlockPredecessors(PostBB, {QFB, TruePred}, "condstore.split", DTU);
3842     if (!NewBB)
3843       return false;
3844     PostBB = NewBB;
3845   }
3846 
3847   // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
3848   // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
3849   Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
3850                      ->getCondition();
3851   Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
3852                      ->getCondition();
3853 
3854   Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
3855                                                 PStore->getParent());
3856   Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
3857                                                 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
3858 
3859   IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
3860 
3861   Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
3862   Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
3863 
3864   if (InvertPCond)
3865     PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
3866   if (InvertQCond)
3867     QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
3868   Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
3869 
3870   auto *T = SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(),
3871                                       /*Unreachable=*/false,
3872                                       /*BranchWeights=*/nullptr, DTU);
3873   QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
3874   StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
3875   SI->setAAMetadata(PStore->getAAMetadata().merge(QStore->getAAMetadata()));
3876   // Choose the minimum alignment. If we could prove both stores execute, we
3877   // could use biggest one.  In this case, though, we only know that one of the
3878   // stores executes.  And we don't know it's safe to take the alignment from a
3879   // store that doesn't execute.
3880   SI->setAlignment(std::min(PStore->getAlign(), QStore->getAlign()));
3881 
3882   QStore->eraseFromParent();
3883   PStore->eraseFromParent();
3884 
3885   return true;
3886 }
3887 
3888 static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI,
3889                                    DomTreeUpdater *DTU, const DataLayout &DL,
3890                                    const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
3891   // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
3892   // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
3893   // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
3894   // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
3895   // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
3896   // PBI and QBI.
3897   //
3898   // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
3899   // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
3900   // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
3901   // sequences can be if-converted away.
3902   //
3903   // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
3904   //
3905   //     PBI       or      PBI        or a combination of the two
3906   //    /   \               | \
3907   //   PTB  PFB             |  PFB
3908   //    \   /               | /
3909   //     QBI                QBI
3910   //    /  \                | \
3911   //   QTB  QFB             |  QFB
3912   //    \  /                | /
3913   //    PostBB            PostBB
3914   //
3915   // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
3916   // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
3917   // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
3918   BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
3919   BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
3920   BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
3921   BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
3922   BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
3923 
3924   // Make sure we have a good guess for PostBB. If QTB's only successor is
3925   // QFB, then QFB is a better PostBB.
3926   if (QTB->getSingleSuccessor() == QFB)
3927     PostBB = QFB;
3928 
3929   // If we couldn't find a good PostBB, stop.
3930   if (!PostBB)
3931     return false;
3932 
3933   bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
3934   // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
3935   if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
3936     std::swap(PFB, PTB);
3937     InvertPCond = true;
3938   }
3939   if (QFB == PostBB) {
3940     std::swap(QFB, QTB);
3941     InvertQCond = true;
3942   }
3943 
3944   // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
3945   // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
3946   if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
3947     PTB = nullptr;
3948   if (QTB == PostBB)
3949     QTB = nullptr;
3950 
3951   // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
3952   // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
3953   // predecessor.
3954   auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
3955     return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P && BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
3956   };
3957   if (!HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
3958       !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
3959     return false;
3960   if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
3961       (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
3962     return false;
3963   if (!QBI->getParent()->hasNUses(2))
3964     return false;
3965 
3966   // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
3967   // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
3968   SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
3969   for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
3970     if (!BB)
3971       continue;
3972     for (auto &I : *BB)
3973       if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3974         PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3975   }
3976   for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
3977     if (!BB)
3978       continue;
3979     for (auto &I : *BB)
3980       if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3981         QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3982   }
3983 
3984   set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
3985   // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
3986   // clear what it contains.
3987   auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
3988 
3989   bool Changed = false;
3990   for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
3991     Changed |=
3992         mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address,
3993                                        InvertPCond, InvertQCond, DTU, DL, TTI);
3994   return Changed;
3995 }
3996 
3997 /// If the previous block ended with a widenable branch, determine if reusing
3998 /// the target block is profitable and legal.  This will have the effect of
3999 /// "widening" PBI, but doesn't require us to reason about hosting safety.
4000 static bool tryWidenCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
4001                                            DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
4002   // TODO: This can be generalized in two important ways:
4003   // 1) We can allow phi nodes in IfFalseBB and simply reuse all the input
4004   //    values from the PBI edge.
4005   // 2) We can sink side effecting instructions into BI's fallthrough
4006   //    successor provided they doesn't contribute to computation of
4007   //    BI's condition.
4008   Value *CondWB, *WC;
4009   BasicBlock *IfTrueBB, *IfFalseBB;
4010   if (!parseWidenableBranch(PBI, CondWB, WC, IfTrueBB, IfFalseBB) ||
4011       IfTrueBB != BI->getParent() || !BI->getParent()->getSinglePredecessor())
4012     return false;
4013   if (!IfFalseBB->phis().empty())
4014     return false; // TODO
4015   // Use lambda to lazily compute expensive condition after cheap ones.
4016   auto NoSideEffects = [](BasicBlock &BB) {
4017     return llvm::none_of(BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
4018         return I.mayWriteToMemory() || I.mayHaveSideEffects();
4019       });
4020   };
4021   if (BI->getSuccessor(1) != IfFalseBB && // no inf looping
4022       BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminatingDeoptimizeCall() && // profitability
4023       NoSideEffects(*BI->getParent())) {
4024     auto *OldSuccessor = BI->getSuccessor(1);
4025     OldSuccessor->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
4026     BI->setSuccessor(1, IfFalseBB);
4027     if (DTU)
4028       DTU->applyUpdates(
4029           {{DominatorTree::Insert, BI->getParent(), IfFalseBB},
4030            {DominatorTree::Delete, BI->getParent(), OldSuccessor}});
4031     return true;
4032   }
4033   if (BI->getSuccessor(0) != IfFalseBB && // no inf looping
4034       BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminatingDeoptimizeCall() && // profitability
4035       NoSideEffects(*BI->getParent())) {
4036     auto *OldSuccessor = BI->getSuccessor(0);
4037     OldSuccessor->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
4038     BI->setSuccessor(0, IfFalseBB);
4039     if (DTU)
4040       DTU->applyUpdates(
4041           {{DominatorTree::Insert, BI->getParent(), IfFalseBB},
4042            {DominatorTree::Delete, BI->getParent(), OldSuccessor}});
4043     return true;
4044   }
4045   return false;
4046 }
4047 
4048 /// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
4049 /// this function tries to simplify it.  We know
4050 /// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
4051 /// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
4052 static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
4053                                            DomTreeUpdater *DTU,
4054                                            const DataLayout &DL,
4055                                            const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
4056   assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
4057   BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
4058 
4059   // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
4060   // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
4061   // this conditional branch redundant.
4062   if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
4063       PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
4064     // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
4065     // knowable.  If this block had a single pred, handle specially, otherwise
4066     // FoldCondBranchOnValueKnownInPredecessor() will handle it.
4067     if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
4068       // Turn this into a branch on constant.
4069       bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
4070       BI->setCondition(
4071           ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue));
4072       return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
4073     }
4074   }
4075 
4076   // If the previous block ended with a widenable branch, determine if reusing
4077   // the target block is profitable and legal.  This will have the effect of
4078   // "widening" PBI, but doesn't require us to reason about hosting safety.
4079   if (tryWidenCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DTU))
4080     return true;
4081 
4082   // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
4083   // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
4084   // merged store at the end.
4085   if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI, DTU, DL, TTI))
4086     return true;
4087 
4088   // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
4089   // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
4090   // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
4091 
4092   // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4093   if (&*BB->instructionsWithoutDebug(false).begin() != BI)
4094     return false;
4095 
4096   int PBIOp, BIOp;
4097   if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
4098     PBIOp = 0;
4099     BIOp = 0;
4100   } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
4101     PBIOp = 0;
4102     BIOp = 1;
4103   } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
4104     PBIOp = 1;
4105     BIOp = 0;
4106   } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
4107     PBIOp = 1;
4108     BIOp = 1;
4109   } else {
4110     return false;
4111   }
4112 
4113   // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
4114   // isn't BB itself.  If so, this is an infinite loop that will
4115   // keep getting unwound.
4116   if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
4117     return false;
4118 
4119   // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
4120   // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
4121   // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
4122 
4123   BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
4124   BasicBlock *RemovedDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp ^ 1);
4125   unsigned NumPhis = 0;
4126   for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);
4127        ++II, ++NumPhis) {
4128     if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
4129       return false;
4130   }
4131 
4132   // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
4133   BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
4134 
4135   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
4136                     << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
4137 
4138   SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 5> Updates;
4139 
4140   // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
4141   // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
4142   // exits.  We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
4143   // (even though that seems likely).  If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
4144   // recursively unpeeling the loop.  Since we know that (after the xform is
4145   // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
4146   // infinite loop with no cond branch.
4147   if (OtherDest == BB) {
4148     // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
4149     // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
4150     BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock =
4151         BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
4152     BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
4153     if (DTU)
4154       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock});
4155     OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
4156   }
4157 
4158   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
4159 
4160   // BI may have other predecessors.  Because of this, we leave
4161   // it alone, but modify PBI.
4162 
4163   // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
4164   Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
4165   IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
4166   if (PBIOp)
4167     PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName() + ".not");
4168 
4169   Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
4170   if (BIOp)
4171     BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName() + ".not");
4172 
4173   // Merge the conditions.
4174   Value *Cond =
4175       createLogicalOp(Builder, Instruction::Or, PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
4176 
4177   // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
4178   PBI->setCondition(Cond);
4179   PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
4180   PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
4181 
4182   if (DTU) {
4183     Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, PBI->getParent(), OtherDest});
4184     Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, PBI->getParent(), RemovedDest});
4185 
4186     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
4187   }
4188 
4189   // Update branch weight for PBI.
4190   uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
4191   uint64_t PredCommon, PredOther, SuccCommon, SuccOther;
4192   bool HasWeights =
4193       extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
4194                              SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
4195   if (HasWeights) {
4196     PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
4197     PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
4198     SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
4199     SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
4200     // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
4201     //                                    PredOther * SuccCommon.
4202     // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
4203     uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
4204                                   PredOther * SuccCommon,
4205                               PredOther * SuccOther};
4206     // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
4207     FitWeights(NewWeights);
4208 
4209     setBranchWeights(PBI, NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]);
4210   }
4211 
4212   // OtherDest may have phi nodes.  If so, add an entry from PBI's
4213   // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
4214   AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
4215 
4216   // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
4217   // it.  If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
4218   // entries for BB and PBI's BB.  If so, insert a select to make
4219   // them agree.
4220   for (PHINode &PN : CommonDest->phis()) {
4221     Value *BIV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
4222     unsigned PBBIdx = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
4223     Value *PBIV = PN.getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
4224     if (BIV != PBIV) {
4225       // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
4226       SelectInst *NV = cast<SelectInst>(
4227           Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName() + ".mux"));
4228       PN.setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
4229       // Although the select has the same condition as PBI, the original branch
4230       // weights for PBI do not apply to the new select because the select's
4231       // 'logical' edges are incoming edges of the phi that is eliminated, not
4232       // the outgoing edges of PBI.
4233       if (HasWeights) {
4234         uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
4235         uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
4236         uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
4237         uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
4238         // The weight to PredCommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal.
4239         // The weight to PredOtherDest should be PredOther * SuccCommon.
4240         uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther),
4241                                   PredOther * SuccCommon};
4242 
4243         FitWeights(NewWeights);
4244 
4245         setBranchWeights(NV, NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]);
4246       }
4247     }
4248   }
4249 
4250   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
4251   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
4252 
4253   // This basic block is probably dead.  We know it has at least
4254   // one fewer predecessor.
4255   return true;
4256 }
4257 
4258 // Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
4259 // true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
4260 // Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
4261 // Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
4262 // non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
4263 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(Instruction *OldTerm,
4264                                                 Value *Cond, BasicBlock *TrueBB,
4265                                                 BasicBlock *FalseBB,
4266                                                 uint32_t TrueWeight,
4267                                                 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
4268   auto *BB = OldTerm->getParent();
4269   // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
4270   // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
4271   // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
4272   // successor.
4273   BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
4274   BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
4275 
4276   SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 2> RemovedSuccessors;
4277 
4278   // Then remove the rest.
4279   for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(OldTerm)) {
4280     // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
4281     if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
4282       KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
4283     else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
4284       KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
4285     else {
4286       Succ->removePredecessor(BB,
4287                               /*KeepOneInputPHIs=*/true);
4288 
4289       if (Succ != TrueBB && Succ != FalseBB)
4290         RemovedSuccessors.insert(Succ);
4291     }
4292   }
4293 
4294   IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
4295   Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
4296 
4297   // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
4298   if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
4299     if (TrueBB == FalseBB) {
4300       // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
4301       // Create an unconditional branch to it.
4302       Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
4303     } else {
4304       // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
4305       // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
4306       BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
4307       if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
4308         setBranchWeights(NewBI, TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
4309     }
4310   } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
4311     // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
4312     // terminator must be unreachable.
4313     new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
4314   } else {
4315     // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
4316     // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
4317     // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
4318     if (!KeepEdge1) {
4319       // Only TrueBB was found.
4320       Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
4321     } else {
4322       // Only FalseBB was found.
4323       Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
4324     }
4325   }
4326 
4327   EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(OldTerm);
4328 
4329   if (DTU) {
4330     SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 2> Updates;
4331     Updates.reserve(RemovedSuccessors.size());
4332     for (auto *RemovedSuccessor : RemovedSuccessors)
4333       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, RemovedSuccessor});
4334     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
4335   }
4336 
4337   return true;
4338 }
4339 
4340 // Replaces
4341 //   (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
4342 // with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
4343 // unconditional otherwise.
4344 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI,
4345                                             SelectInst *Select) {
4346   // Check for constant integer values in the select.
4347   ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
4348   ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
4349   if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
4350     return false;
4351 
4352   // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
4353   Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
4354   BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
4355   BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
4356 
4357   // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
4358   uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
4359   SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
4360   bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
4361   if (HasWeights) {
4362     GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4363     if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
4364       TrueWeight =
4365           (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
4366       FalseWeight =
4367           (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
4368     }
4369   }
4370 
4371   // Perform the actual simplification.
4372   return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, TrueWeight,
4373                                     FalseWeight);
4374 }
4375 
4376 // Replaces
4377 //   (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
4378 //                             blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
4379 // with
4380 //   (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
4381 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI,
4382                                                 SelectInst *SI) {
4383   // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
4384   BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
4385   BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
4386   if (!TBA || !FBA)
4387     return false;
4388 
4389   // Extract the actual blocks.
4390   BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
4391   BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
4392 
4393   // Perform the actual simplification.
4394   return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, 0,
4395                                     0);
4396 }
4397 
4398 /// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
4399 /// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
4400 /// block that ends with an uncond branch.  We are looking for a very specific
4401 /// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified.  In
4402 /// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
4403 /// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
4404 /// like:
4405 ///
4406 ///   switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end    i8 2, label %end ]
4407 /// DEFAULT:
4408 ///   %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
4409 ///   br label %end
4410 /// end:
4411 ///   ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
4412 ///
4413 /// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
4414 /// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
4415 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
4416     ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4417   BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
4418 
4419   // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
4420   // complex.
4421   if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse())
4422     return false;
4423 
4424   Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
4425   ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
4426 
4427   // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
4428   // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch.  In this case we can
4429   // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
4430   BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
4431   if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
4432     return false;
4433 
4434   SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
4435   if (SI->getCondition() != V)
4436     return false;
4437 
4438   // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
4439   // V in this block.  Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
4440   // away.
4441   if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
4442     ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
4443     assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
4444     ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
4445 
4446     if (Value *V = simplifyInstruction(ICI, {DL, ICI})) {
4447       ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
4448       ICI->eraseFromParent();
4449     }
4450     // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
4451     return requestResimplify();
4452   }
4453 
4454   // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest.  If the constant we're
4455   // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
4456   // and zap it.
4457   if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
4458     Value *V;
4459     if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
4460       V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
4461     else
4462       V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
4463 
4464     ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
4465     ICI->eraseFromParent();
4466     // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
4467     return requestResimplify();
4468   }
4469 
4470   // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
4471   // the block.
4472   BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
4473   PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
4474   if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
4475       isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
4476     return false;
4477 
4478   // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
4479   // true in the PHI.
4480   Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
4481   Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
4482 
4483   if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
4484     std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
4485 
4486   // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
4487   // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
4488   ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
4489   ICI->eraseFromParent();
4490 
4491   SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 2> Updates;
4492 
4493   // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value.  Add an edge from
4494   // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
4495   BasicBlock *NewBB =
4496       BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", BB->getParent(), BB);
4497   {
4498     SwitchInstProfUpdateWrapper SIW(*SI);
4499     auto W0 = SIW.getSuccessorWeight(0);
4500     SwitchInstProfUpdateWrapper::CaseWeightOpt NewW;
4501     if (W0) {
4502       NewW = ((uint64_t(*W0) + 1) >> 1);
4503       SIW.setSuccessorWeight(0, *NewW);
4504     }
4505     SIW.addCase(Cst, NewBB, NewW);
4506     if (DTU)
4507       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, Pred, NewBB});
4508   }
4509 
4510   // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
4511   Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
4512   Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
4513   Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
4514   PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
4515   if (DTU) {
4516     Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, NewBB, SuccBlock});
4517     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
4518   }
4519   return true;
4520 }
4521 
4522 /// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
4523 /// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
4524 /// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
4525 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI,
4526                                                IRBuilder<> &Builder,
4527                                                const DataLayout &DL) {
4528   Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
4529   if (!Cond)
4530     return false;
4531 
4532   // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
4533   // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
4534   // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
4535 
4536   // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
4537   ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
4538   // Unpack the result
4539   SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
4540   Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
4541   unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
4542   Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
4543 
4544   // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
4545   if (!CompVal)
4546     return false;
4547 
4548   // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
4549   if (UsedICmps <= 1)
4550     return false;
4551 
4552   bool TrueWhenEqual = match(Cond, m_LogicalOr(m_Value(), m_Value()));
4553 
4554   // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
4555   // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
4556   array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
4557   Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
4558 
4559   // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
4560   // transformation.  A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
4561   if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2)
4562     return false;
4563 
4564   // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
4565   // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
4566 
4567   // Figure out which block is which destination.
4568   BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
4569   BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
4570   if (!TrueWhenEqual)
4571     std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
4572 
4573   BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
4574 
4575   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
4576                     << " cases into SWITCH.  BB is:\n"
4577                     << *BB);
4578 
4579   SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 2> Updates;
4580 
4581   // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
4582   // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
4583   // right before the condbr to handle it.
4584   if (ExtraCase) {
4585     BasicBlock *NewBB = SplitBlock(BB, BI, DTU, /*LI=*/nullptr,
4586                                    /*MSSAU=*/nullptr, "switch.early.test");
4587 
4588     // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
4589     Instruction *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
4590     Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
4591 
4592     // There can be an unintended UB if extra values are Poison. Before the
4593     // transformation, extra values may not be evaluated according to the
4594     // condition, and it will not raise UB. But after transformation, we are
4595     // evaluating extra values before checking the condition, and it will raise
4596     // UB. It can be solved by adding freeze instruction to extra values.
4597     AssumptionCache *AC = Options.AC;
4598 
4599     if (!isGuaranteedNotToBeUndefOrPoison(ExtraCase, AC, BI, nullptr))
4600       ExtraCase = Builder.CreateFreeze(ExtraCase);
4601 
4602     if (TrueWhenEqual)
4603       Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
4604     else
4605       Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
4606 
4607     OldTI->eraseFromParent();
4608 
4609     if (DTU)
4610       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, BB, EdgeBB});
4611 
4612     // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
4613     // for the edge we just added.
4614     AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
4615 
4616     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "  ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
4617                       << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
4618     BB = NewBB;
4619   }
4620 
4621   Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
4622   // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
4623   if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
4624     CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
4625         CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
4626   }
4627 
4628   // Create the new switch instruction now.
4629   SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
4630 
4631   // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
4632   for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
4633     New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
4634 
4635   // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB.  As such, if there were any
4636   // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
4637   // the number of edges added.
4638   for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4639     PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
4640     Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
4641     for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size() - 1; i != e; ++i)
4642       PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
4643   }
4644 
4645   // Erase the old branch instruction.
4646   EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
4647   if (DTU)
4648     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
4649 
4650   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "  ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
4651   return true;
4652 }
4653 
4654 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4655   if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
4656     return simplifyCommonResume(RI);
4657   else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
4658            RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
4659     // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
4660     return simplifySingleResume(RI);
4661 
4662   return false;
4663 }
4664 
4665 // Check if cleanup block is empty
4666 static bool isCleanupBlockEmpty(iterator_range<BasicBlock::iterator> R) {
4667   for (Instruction &I : R) {
4668     auto *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(&I);
4669     if (!II)
4670       return false;
4671 
4672     Intrinsic::ID IntrinsicID = II->getIntrinsicID();
4673     switch (IntrinsicID) {
4674     case Intrinsic::dbg_declare:
4675     case Intrinsic::dbg_value:
4676     case Intrinsic::dbg_label:
4677     case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
4678       break;
4679     default:
4680       return false;
4681     }
4682   }
4683   return true;
4684 }
4685 
4686 // Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
4687 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
4688   BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
4689 
4690   // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug and lifetime
4691   // intrinsics between the phi's and resume instruction.
4692   if (!isCleanupBlockEmpty(
4693           make_range(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI(), BB->getTerminator())))
4694     return false;
4695 
4696   SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
4697   auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
4698 
4699   // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
4700   for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues(); Idx != End;
4701        Idx++) {
4702     auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
4703     auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
4704 
4705     // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
4706     // it has other dependents.
4707     if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
4708       continue;
4709 
4710     auto *LandingPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
4711     // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
4712     if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
4713       continue;
4714 
4715     if (isCleanupBlockEmpty(
4716             make_range(LandingPad->getNextNode(), IncomingBB->getTerminator())))
4717       TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
4718   }
4719 
4720   // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
4721   if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty())
4722     return false;
4723 
4724   // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
4725   for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
4726     // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
4727     // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
4728     // to remove them all.
4729     while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
4730       BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
4731 
4732     for (BasicBlock *Pred :
4733          llvm::make_early_inc_range(predecessors(TrivialBB))) {
4734       removeUnwindEdge(Pred, DTU);
4735       ++NumInvokes;
4736     }
4737 
4738     // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
4739     // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
4740     // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
4741     // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
4742     // predecessors.
4743     TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
4744     new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
4745     if (DTU)
4746       DTU->applyUpdates({{DominatorTree::Delete, TrivialBB, BB}});
4747   }
4748 
4749   // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
4750   if (pred_empty(BB))
4751     DeleteDeadBlock(BB, DTU);
4752 
4753   return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
4754 }
4755 
4756 // Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
4757 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
4758   BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
4759   auto *LPInst = cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
4760   assert(RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
4761          "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
4762 
4763   // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
4764   if (!isCleanupBlockEmpty(
4765           make_range<Instruction *>(LPInst->getNextNode(), RI)))
4766     return false;
4767 
4768   // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
4769   for (BasicBlock *Pred : llvm::make_early_inc_range(predecessors(BB))) {
4770     removeUnwindEdge(Pred, DTU);
4771     ++NumInvokes;
4772   }
4773 
4774   // The landingpad is now unreachable.  Zap it.
4775   DeleteDeadBlock(BB, DTU);
4776   return true;
4777 }
4778 
4779 static bool removeEmptyCleanup(CleanupReturnInst *RI, DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
4780   // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
4781   // eliminated.  If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
4782   // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
4783   // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
4784   // instruction converted to a call instruction.  If the cleanup pad being
4785   // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
4786   // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
4787   // simplified.
4788   BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
4789   CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
4790   if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
4791     // This isn't an empty cleanup.
4792     return false;
4793 
4794   // We cannot kill the pad if it has multiple uses.  This typically arises
4795   // from unreachable basic blocks.
4796   if (!CPInst->hasOneUse())
4797     return false;
4798 
4799   // Check that there are no other instructions except for benign intrinsics.
4800   if (!isCleanupBlockEmpty(
4801           make_range<Instruction *>(CPInst->getNextNode(), RI)))
4802     return false;
4803 
4804   // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
4805   // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
4806   BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
4807   Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
4808 
4809   // We're about to remove BB from the control flow.  Before we do, sink any
4810   // PHINodes into the unwind destination.  Doing this before changing the
4811   // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
4812   // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
4813   // are both EH pads).
4814   if (UnwindDest) {
4815     // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
4816     // reference the block we are removing
4817     for (PHINode &DestPN : UnwindDest->phis()) {
4818       int Idx = DestPN.getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
4819       // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
4820       assert(Idx != -1);
4821       // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
4822       // path through the cleanup pad we are removing.  If the incoming
4823       // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
4824       // verified above that the block is otherwise empty).  Otherwise, the
4825       // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
4826       // pad being removed.
4827       //
4828       // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
4829       // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
4830       // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
4831       // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
4832       Value *SrcVal = DestPN.getIncomingValue(Idx);
4833       PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
4834 
4835       bool NeedPHITranslation = SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB;
4836       for (auto *Pred : predecessors(BB)) {
4837         Value *Incoming =
4838             NeedPHITranslation ? SrcPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(Pred) : SrcVal;
4839         DestPN.addIncoming(Incoming, Pred);
4840       }
4841     }
4842 
4843     // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
4844     Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
4845     for (PHINode &PN : make_early_inc_range(BB->phis())) {
4846       if (PN.use_empty() || !PN.isUsedOutsideOfBlock(BB))
4847         // If the PHI node has no uses or all of its uses are in this basic
4848         // block (meaning they are debug or lifetime intrinsics), just leave
4849         // it.  It will be erased when we erase BB below.
4850         continue;
4851 
4852       // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
4853       // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
4854       // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
4855       // BB.  In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
4856       for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
4857         if (pred != BB)
4858           PN.addIncoming(&PN, pred);
4859       PN.moveBefore(InsertPt);
4860       // Also, add a dummy incoming value for the original BB itself,
4861       // so that the PHI is well-formed until we drop said predecessor.
4862       PN.addIncoming(UndefValue::get(PN.getType()), BB);
4863     }
4864   }
4865 
4866   std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
4867 
4868   // We use make_early_inc_range here because we will remove all predecessors.
4869   for (BasicBlock *PredBB : llvm::make_early_inc_range(predecessors(BB))) {
4870     if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
4871       if (DTU) {
4872         DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
4873         Updates.clear();
4874       }
4875       removeUnwindEdge(PredBB, DTU);
4876       ++NumInvokes;
4877     } else {
4878       BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
4879       Instruction *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
4880       TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
4881       if (DTU) {
4882         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, PredBB, UnwindDest});
4883         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, PredBB, BB});
4884       }
4885     }
4886   }
4887 
4888   if (DTU)
4889     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
4890 
4891   DeleteDeadBlock(BB, DTU);
4892 
4893   return true;
4894 }
4895 
4896 // Try to merge two cleanuppads together.
4897 static bool mergeCleanupPad(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
4898   // Skip any cleanuprets which unwind to caller, there is nothing to merge
4899   // with.
4900   BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
4901   if (!UnwindDest)
4902     return false;
4903 
4904   // This cleanupret isn't the only predecessor of this cleanuppad, it wouldn't
4905   // be safe to merge without code duplication.
4906   if (UnwindDest->getSinglePredecessor() != RI->getParent())
4907     return false;
4908 
4909   // Verify that our cleanuppad's unwind destination is another cleanuppad.
4910   auto *SuccessorCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(&UnwindDest->front());
4911   if (!SuccessorCleanupPad)
4912     return false;
4913 
4914   CleanupPadInst *PredecessorCleanupPad = RI->getCleanupPad();
4915   // Replace any uses of the successor cleanupad with the predecessor pad
4916   // The only cleanuppad uses should be this cleanupret, it's cleanupret and
4917   // funclet bundle operands.
4918   SuccessorCleanupPad->replaceAllUsesWith(PredecessorCleanupPad);
4919   // Remove the old cleanuppad.
4920   SuccessorCleanupPad->eraseFromParent();
4921   // Now, we simply replace the cleanupret with a branch to the unwind
4922   // destination.
4923   BranchInst::Create(UnwindDest, RI->getParent());
4924   RI->eraseFromParent();
4925 
4926   return true;
4927 }
4928 
4929 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
4930   // It is possible to transiantly have an undef cleanuppad operand because we
4931   // have deleted some, but not all, dead blocks.
4932   // Eventually, this block will be deleted.
4933   if (isa<UndefValue>(RI->getOperand(0)))
4934     return false;
4935 
4936   if (mergeCleanupPad(RI))
4937     return true;
4938 
4939   if (removeEmptyCleanup(RI, DTU))
4940     return true;
4941 
4942   return false;
4943 }
4944 
4945 // WARNING: keep in sync with InstCombinerImpl::visitUnreachableInst()!
4946 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
4947   BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
4948 
4949   bool Changed = false;
4950 
4951   // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
4952   // be removed, do so.
4953   while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
4954     BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
4955     --BBI;
4956 
4957     if (!isGuaranteedToTransferExecutionToSuccessor(&*BBI))
4958       break; // Can not drop any more instructions. We're done here.
4959     // Otherwise, this instruction can be freely erased,
4960     // even if it is not side-effect free.
4961 
4962     // Note that deleting EH's here is in fact okay, although it involves a bit
4963     // of subtle reasoning. If this inst is an EH, all the predecessors of this
4964     // block will be the unwind edges of Invoke/CatchSwitch/CleanupReturn,
4965     // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
4966 
4967     // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
4968     BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(PoisonValue::get(BBI->getType()));
4969     BBI->eraseFromParent();
4970     Changed = true;
4971   }
4972 
4973   // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
4974   // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
4975   if (&BB->front() != UI)
4976     return Changed;
4977 
4978   std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
4979 
4980   SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
4981   for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
4982     auto *Predecessor = Preds[i];
4983     Instruction *TI = Predecessor->getTerminator();
4984     IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
4985     if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
4986       // We could either have a proper unconditional branch,
4987       // or a degenerate conditional branch with matching destinations.
4988       if (all_of(BI->successors(),
4989                  [BB](auto *Successor) { return Successor == BB; })) {
4990         new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4991         TI->eraseFromParent();
4992         Changed = true;
4993       } else {
4994         assert(BI->isConditional() && "Can't get here with an uncond branch.");
4995         Value* Cond = BI->getCondition();
4996         assert(BI->getSuccessor(0) != BI->getSuccessor(1) &&
4997                "The destinations are guaranteed to be different here.");
4998         if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
4999           Builder.CreateAssumption(Builder.CreateNot(Cond));
5000           Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
5001         } else {
5002           assert(BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB && "Incorrect CFG");
5003           Builder.CreateAssumption(Cond);
5004           Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
5005         }
5006         EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
5007         Changed = true;
5008       }
5009       if (DTU)
5010         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, Predecessor, BB});
5011     } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
5012       SwitchInstProfUpdateWrapper SU(*SI);
5013       for (auto i = SU->case_begin(), e = SU->case_end(); i != e;) {
5014         if (i->getCaseSuccessor() != BB) {
5015           ++i;
5016           continue;
5017         }
5018         BB->removePredecessor(SU->getParent());
5019         i = SU.removeCase(i);
5020         e = SU->case_end();
5021         Changed = true;
5022       }
5023       // Note that the default destination can't be removed!
5024       if (DTU && SI->getDefaultDest() != BB)
5025         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, Predecessor, BB});
5026     } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
5027       if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
5028         if (DTU) {
5029           DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
5030           Updates.clear();
5031         }
5032         removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent(), DTU);
5033         Changed = true;
5034       }
5035     } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
5036       if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
5037         if (DTU) {
5038           DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
5039           Updates.clear();
5040         }
5041         removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent(), DTU);
5042         Changed = true;
5043         continue;
5044       }
5045 
5046       for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
5047                                              E = CSI->handler_end();
5048            I != E; ++I) {
5049         if (*I == BB) {
5050           CSI->removeHandler(I);
5051           --I;
5052           --E;
5053           Changed = true;
5054         }
5055       }
5056       if (DTU)
5057         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, Predecessor, BB});
5058       if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
5059         if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
5060           // Redirect all predecessors of the block containing CatchSwitchInst
5061           // to instead branch to the CatchSwitchInst's unwind destination.
5062           if (DTU) {
5063             for (auto *PredecessorOfPredecessor : predecessors(Predecessor)) {
5064               Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert,
5065                                  PredecessorOfPredecessor,
5066                                  CSI->getUnwindDest()});
5067               Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete,
5068                                  PredecessorOfPredecessor, Predecessor});
5069             }
5070           }
5071           Predecessor->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
5072         } else {
5073           // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
5074           if (DTU) {
5075             DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
5076             Updates.clear();
5077           }
5078           SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(Predecessor));
5079           for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
5080             removeUnwindEdge(EHPred, DTU);
5081         }
5082         // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
5083         new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
5084         CSI->eraseFromParent();
5085         Changed = true;
5086       }
5087     } else if (auto *CRI = dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
5088       (void)CRI;
5089       assert(CRI->hasUnwindDest() && CRI->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
5090              "Expected to always have an unwind to BB.");
5091       if (DTU)
5092         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, Predecessor, BB});
5093       new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
5094       TI->eraseFromParent();
5095       Changed = true;
5096     }
5097   }
5098 
5099   if (DTU)
5100     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
5101 
5102   // If this block is now dead, remove it.
5103   if (pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
5104     DeleteDeadBlock(BB, DTU);
5105     return true;
5106   }
5107 
5108   return Changed;
5109 }
5110 
5111 static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
5112   assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
5113 
5114   array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
5115   for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
5116     if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
5117       return false;
5118   }
5119   return true;
5120 }
5121 
5122 static void createUnreachableSwitchDefault(SwitchInst *Switch,
5123                                            DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
5124   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
5125   auto *BB = Switch->getParent();
5126   auto *OrigDefaultBlock = Switch->getDefaultDest();
5127   OrigDefaultBlock->removePredecessor(BB);
5128   BasicBlock *NewDefaultBlock = BasicBlock::Create(
5129       BB->getContext(), BB->getName() + ".unreachabledefault", BB->getParent(),
5130       OrigDefaultBlock);
5131   new UnreachableInst(Switch->getContext(), NewDefaultBlock);
5132   Switch->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefaultBlock);
5133   if (DTU) {
5134     SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 2> Updates;
5135     Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, BB, &*NewDefaultBlock});
5136     if (!is_contained(successors(BB), OrigDefaultBlock))
5137       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, &*OrigDefaultBlock});
5138     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
5139   }
5140 }
5141 
5142 /// Turn a switch into an integer range comparison and branch.
5143 /// Switches with more than 2 destinations are ignored.
5144 /// Switches with 1 destination are also ignored.
5145 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI,
5146                                              IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
5147   assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
5148 
5149   bool HasDefault =
5150       !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
5151 
5152   auto *BB = SI->getParent();
5153 
5154   // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
5155   BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
5156   BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
5157   SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
5158   SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
5159 
5160   for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
5161     BasicBlock *Dest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
5162     if (!DestA)
5163       DestA = Dest;
5164     if (Dest == DestA) {
5165       CasesA.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
5166       continue;
5167     }
5168     if (!DestB)
5169       DestB = Dest;
5170     if (Dest == DestB) {
5171       CasesB.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
5172       continue;
5173     }
5174     return false; // More than two destinations.
5175   }
5176   if (!DestB)
5177     return false; // All destinations are the same and the default is unreachable
5178 
5179   assert(DestA && DestB &&
5180          "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
5181   assert(DestA != DestB);
5182   assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
5183   assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
5184   assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
5185 
5186   // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
5187   SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
5188   BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
5189   BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
5190   if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
5191     ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
5192     ContiguousDest = DestA;
5193     OtherDest = DestB;
5194   } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
5195     ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
5196     ContiguousDest = DestB;
5197     OtherDest = DestA;
5198   } else
5199     return false;
5200 
5201   // Start building the compare and branch.
5202 
5203   Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
5204   Constant *NumCases =
5205       ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
5206 
5207   Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
5208   if (!Offset->isNullValue())
5209     Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
5210 
5211   Value *Cmp;
5212   // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
5213   if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
5214     Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
5215   else
5216     Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
5217   BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
5218 
5219   // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
5220   if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
5221     SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
5222     GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
5223     if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
5224       uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
5225       uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
5226       for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
5227         if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
5228           TrueWeight += Weights[I];
5229         else
5230           FalseWeight += Weights[I];
5231       }
5232       while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
5233         TrueWeight /= 2;
5234         FalseWeight /= 2;
5235       }
5236       setBranchWeights(NewBI, TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
5237     }
5238   }
5239 
5240   // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
5241   for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
5242     unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
5243     if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
5244       ++PreviousEdges;
5245     for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
5246       cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
5247   }
5248   for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
5249     unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
5250     if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
5251       ++PreviousEdges;
5252     for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
5253       cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
5254   }
5255 
5256   // Clean up the default block - it may have phis or other instructions before
5257   // the unreachable terminator.
5258   if (!HasDefault)
5259     createUnreachableSwitchDefault(SI, DTU);
5260 
5261   auto *UnreachableDefault = SI->getDefaultDest();
5262 
5263   // Drop the switch.
5264   SI->eraseFromParent();
5265 
5266   if (!HasDefault && DTU)
5267     DTU->applyUpdates({{DominatorTree::Delete, BB, UnreachableDefault}});
5268 
5269   return true;
5270 }
5271 
5272 /// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
5273 /// and use it to remove dead cases.
5274 static bool eliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, DomTreeUpdater *DTU,
5275                                      AssumptionCache *AC,
5276                                      const DataLayout &DL) {
5277   Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
5278   KnownBits Known = computeKnownBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI);
5279 
5280   // We can also eliminate cases by determining that their values are outside of
5281   // the limited range of the condition based on how many significant (non-sign)
5282   // bits are in the condition value.
5283   unsigned MaxSignificantBitsInCond =
5284       ComputeMaxSignificantBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI);
5285 
5286   // Gather dead cases.
5287   SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> DeadCases;
5288   SmallDenseMap<BasicBlock *, int, 8> NumPerSuccessorCases;
5289   SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> UniqueSuccessors;
5290   for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
5291     auto *Successor = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
5292     if (DTU) {
5293       if (!NumPerSuccessorCases.count(Successor))
5294         UniqueSuccessors.push_back(Successor);
5295       ++NumPerSuccessorCases[Successor];
5296     }
5297     const APInt &CaseVal = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
5298     if (Known.Zero.intersects(CaseVal) || !Known.One.isSubsetOf(CaseVal) ||
5299         (CaseVal.getMinSignedBits() > MaxSignificantBitsInCond)) {
5300       DeadCases.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
5301       if (DTU)
5302         --NumPerSuccessorCases[Successor];
5303       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case " << CaseVal
5304                         << " is dead.\n");
5305     }
5306   }
5307 
5308   // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
5309   // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it.  If we know some
5310   // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
5311   // number of possible unique case values.
5312   bool HasDefault =
5313       !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
5314   const unsigned NumUnknownBits =
5315       Known.getBitWidth() - (Known.Zero | Known.One).countPopulation();
5316   assert(NumUnknownBits <= Known.getBitWidth());
5317   if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
5318       NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
5319       SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
5320     createUnreachableSwitchDefault(SI, DTU);
5321     return true;
5322   }
5323 
5324   if (DeadCases.empty())
5325     return false;
5326 
5327   SwitchInstProfUpdateWrapper SIW(*SI);
5328   for (ConstantInt *DeadCase : DeadCases) {
5329     SwitchInst::CaseIt CaseI = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCase);
5330     assert(CaseI != SI->case_default() &&
5331            "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
5332     // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
5333     CaseI->getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
5334     SIW.removeCase(CaseI);
5335   }
5336 
5337   if (DTU) {
5338     std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
5339     for (auto *Successor : UniqueSuccessors)
5340       if (NumPerSuccessorCases[Successor] == 0)
5341         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, SI->getParent(), Successor});
5342     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
5343   }
5344 
5345   return true;
5346 }
5347 
5348 /// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
5349 /// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
5350 /// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
5351 /// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
5352 /// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
5353 static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
5354                                               BasicBlock *BB, int *PhiIndex) {
5355   if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
5356     return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
5357   if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
5358     return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
5359 
5360   BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
5361   if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
5362     return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
5363 
5364   BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
5365 
5366   for (PHINode &PHI : Succ->phis()) {
5367     int Idx = PHI.getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
5368     assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
5369 
5370     Value *InValue = PHI.getIncomingValue(Idx);
5371     if (InValue != CaseValue)
5372       continue;
5373 
5374     *PhiIndex = Idx;
5375     return &PHI;
5376   }
5377 
5378   return nullptr;
5379 }
5380 
5381 /// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
5382 /// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
5383 /// blocks of the switch can be folded away. Return true if a change is made.
5384 static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
5385   using ForwardingNodesMap = DenseMap<PHINode *, SmallVector<int, 4>>;
5386 
5387   ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
5388   BasicBlock *SwitchBlock = SI->getParent();
5389   bool Changed = false;
5390   for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
5391     ConstantInt *CaseValue = Case.getCaseValue();
5392     BasicBlock *CaseDest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
5393 
5394     // Replace phi operands in successor blocks that are using the constant case
5395     // value rather than the switch condition variable:
5396     //   switchbb:
5397     //   switch i32 %x, label %default [
5398     //     i32 17, label %succ
5399     //   ...
5400     //   succ:
5401     //     %r = phi i32 ... [ 17, %switchbb ] ...
5402     // -->
5403     //     %r = phi i32 ... [ %x, %switchbb ] ...
5404 
5405     for (PHINode &Phi : CaseDest->phis()) {
5406       // This only works if there is exactly 1 incoming edge from the switch to
5407       // a phi. If there is >1, that means multiple cases of the switch map to 1
5408       // value in the phi, and that phi value is not the switch condition. Thus,
5409       // this transform would not make sense (the phi would be invalid because
5410       // a phi can't have different incoming values from the same block).
5411       int SwitchBBIdx = Phi.getBasicBlockIndex(SwitchBlock);
5412       if (Phi.getIncomingValue(SwitchBBIdx) == CaseValue &&
5413           count(Phi.blocks(), SwitchBlock) == 1) {
5414         Phi.setIncomingValue(SwitchBBIdx, SI->getCondition());
5415         Changed = true;
5416       }
5417     }
5418 
5419     // Collect phi nodes that are indirectly using this switch's case constants.
5420     int PhiIdx;
5421     if (auto *Phi = FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, &PhiIdx))
5422       ForwardingNodes[Phi].push_back(PhiIdx);
5423   }
5424 
5425   for (auto &ForwardingNode : ForwardingNodes) {
5426     PHINode *Phi = ForwardingNode.first;
5427     SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = ForwardingNode.second;
5428     if (Indexes.size() < 2)
5429       continue;
5430 
5431     for (int Index : Indexes)
5432       Phi->setIncomingValue(Index, SI->getCondition());
5433     Changed = true;
5434   }
5435 
5436   return Changed;
5437 }
5438 
5439 /// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
5440 /// initializing an array of constants like C.
5441 static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
5442   if (C->isThreadDependent())
5443     return false;
5444   if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
5445     return false;
5446 
5447   if (!isa<ConstantFP>(C) && !isa<ConstantInt>(C) &&
5448       !isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) && !isa<GlobalValue>(C) &&
5449       !isa<UndefValue>(C) && !isa<ConstantExpr>(C))
5450     return false;
5451 
5452   if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C)) {
5453     // Pointer casts and in-bounds GEPs will not prohibit the backend from
5454     // materializing the array of constants.
5455     Constant *StrippedC = cast<Constant>(CE->stripInBoundsConstantOffsets());
5456     if (StrippedC == C || !ValidLookupTableConstant(StrippedC, TTI))
5457       return false;
5458   }
5459 
5460   if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTablesForConstant(C))
5461     return false;
5462 
5463   return true;
5464 }
5465 
5466 /// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
5467 /// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
5468 static Constant *
5469 LookupConstant(Value *V,
5470                const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
5471   if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
5472     return C;
5473   return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
5474 }
5475 
5476 /// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
5477 /// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
5478 /// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
5479 /// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
5480 static Constant *
5481 ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
5482              const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
5483   if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
5484     Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
5485     if (!A)
5486       return nullptr;
5487     if (A->isAllOnesValue())
5488       return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
5489     if (A->isNullValue())
5490       return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
5491     return nullptr;
5492   }
5493 
5494   SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
5495   for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
5496     if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
5497       COps.push_back(A);
5498     else
5499       return nullptr;
5500   }
5501 
5502   return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
5503 }
5504 
5505 /// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
5506 /// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
5507 /// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
5508 /// case), of a switch instruction SI.
5509 static bool
5510 getCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
5511                BasicBlock **CommonDest,
5512                SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
5513                const DataLayout &DL, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
5514   // The block from which we enter the common destination.
5515   BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
5516 
5517   // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
5518   // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
5519   SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> ConstantPool;
5520   ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
5521   for (Instruction &I : CaseDest->instructionsWithoutDebug(false)) {
5522     if (I.isTerminator()) {
5523       // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
5524       if (I.getNumSuccessors() != 1 || I.isExceptionalTerminator())
5525         return false;
5526       Pred = CaseDest;
5527       CaseDest = I.getSuccessor(0);
5528     } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
5529       // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
5530 
5531       // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
5532       // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
5533       // no longer dominate all its uses.
5534       for (auto &Use : I.uses()) {
5535         User *User = Use.getUser();
5536         if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
5537           if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
5538             continue;
5539         if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
5540           if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
5541             continue;
5542         return false;
5543       }
5544 
5545       ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&I, C));
5546     } else {
5547       break;
5548     }
5549   }
5550 
5551   // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
5552   if (!*CommonDest)
5553     *CommonDest = CaseDest;
5554   // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
5555   if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
5556     return false;
5557 
5558   // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
5559   for (PHINode &PHI : (*CommonDest)->phis()) {
5560     int Idx = PHI.getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
5561     if (Idx == -1)
5562       continue;
5563 
5564     Constant *ConstVal =
5565         LookupConstant(PHI.getIncomingValue(Idx), ConstantPool);
5566     if (!ConstVal)
5567       return false;
5568 
5569     // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
5570     if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal, TTI))
5571       return false;
5572 
5573     Res.push_back(std::make_pair(&PHI, ConstVal));
5574   }
5575 
5576   return Res.size() > 0;
5577 }
5578 
5579 // Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
5580 // Result. Returns the updated number of cases that generate this result.
5581 static size_t mapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
5582                               SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
5583                               Constant *Result) {
5584   for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
5585     if (I.first == Result) {
5586       I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
5587       return I.second.size();
5588     }
5589   }
5590   UniqueResults.push_back(
5591       std::make_pair(Result, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
5592   return 1;
5593 }
5594 
5595 // Helper function that initializes a map containing
5596 // results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
5597 // instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
5598 // there is not a common destination block for the switch.
5599 static bool initializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI,
5600                                   BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
5601                                   SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
5602                                   Constant *&DefaultResult,
5603                                   const DataLayout &DL,
5604                                   const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
5605                                   uintptr_t MaxUniqueResults) {
5606   for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
5607     ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
5608 
5609     // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
5610     SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
5611     if (!getCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
5612                         DL, TTI))
5613       return false;
5614 
5615     // Only one value per case is permitted.
5616     if (Results.size() > 1)
5617       return false;
5618 
5619     // Add the case->result mapping to UniqueResults.
5620     const size_t NumCasesForResult =
5621         mapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
5622 
5623     // Early out if there are too many cases for this result.
5624     if (NumCasesForResult > MaxSwitchCasesPerResult)
5625       return false;
5626 
5627     // Early out if there are too many unique results.
5628     if (UniqueResults.size() > MaxUniqueResults)
5629       return false;
5630 
5631     // Check the PHI consistency.
5632     if (!PHI)
5633       PHI = Results[0].first;
5634     else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
5635       return false;
5636   }
5637   // Find the default result value.
5638   SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
5639   BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
5640   getCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
5641                  DL, TTI);
5642   // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
5643   // is unreachable.
5644   DefaultResult =
5645       DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
5646   if ((!DefaultResult &&
5647        !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
5648     return false;
5649 
5650   return true;
5651 }
5652 
5653 // Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
5654 // two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
5655 // TODO: Handle switches with more than 2 cases that map to the same result.
5656 static Value *foldSwitchToSelect(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
5657                                  Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
5658                                  IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
5659   // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
5660   // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
5661   // Example:
5662   // switch (a) {                  %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
5663   //   case 10: return 42;         %1 = select i1 %0, i32 42, i32 4
5664   //   case 20: return 2;   ---->  %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
5665   //   default: return 4;          %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
5666   // }
5667   if (ResultVector.size() == 2 && ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
5668       ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
5669     ConstantInt *FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
5670     ConstantInt *SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
5671     Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
5672     if (DefaultResult) {
5673       Value *ValueCompare =
5674           Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
5675       SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
5676                                          DefaultResult, "switch.select");
5677     }
5678     Value *ValueCompare =
5679         Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
5680     return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first,
5681                                 SelectValue, "switch.select");
5682   }
5683 
5684   // Handle the degenerate case where two cases have the same result value.
5685   if (ResultVector.size() == 1 && DefaultResult) {
5686     ArrayRef<ConstantInt *> CaseValues = ResultVector[0].second;
5687     unsigned CaseCount = CaseValues.size();
5688     // n bits group cases map to the same result:
5689     // case 0,4      -> Cond & 0b1..1011 == 0 ? result : default
5690     // case 0,2,4,6  -> Cond & 0b1..1001 == 0 ? result : default
5691     // case 0,2,8,10 -> Cond & 0b1..0101 == 0 ? result : default
5692     if (isPowerOf2_32(CaseCount)) {
5693       ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CaseValues[0];
5694       // Find mininal value.
5695       for (auto Case : CaseValues)
5696         if (Case->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
5697           MinCaseVal = Case;
5698 
5699       // Mark the bits case number touched.
5700       APInt BitMask = APInt::getZero(MinCaseVal->getBitWidth());
5701       for (auto Case : CaseValues)
5702         BitMask |= (Case->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue());
5703 
5704       // Check if cases with the same result can cover all number
5705       // in touched bits.
5706       if (BitMask.countPopulation() == Log2_32(CaseCount)) {
5707         if (!MinCaseVal->isNullValue())
5708           Condition = Builder.CreateSub(Condition, MinCaseVal);
5709         Value *And = Builder.CreateAnd(Condition, ~BitMask, "switch.and");
5710         Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpEQ(
5711             And, Constant::getNullValue(And->getType()), "switch.selectcmp");
5712         return Builder.CreateSelect(Cmp, ResultVector[0].first, DefaultResult);
5713       }
5714     }
5715 
5716     // Handle the degenerate case where two cases have the same value.
5717     if (CaseValues.size() == 2) {
5718       Value *Cmp1 = Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, CaseValues[0],
5719                                          "switch.selectcmp.case1");
5720       Value *Cmp2 = Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, CaseValues[1],
5721                                          "switch.selectcmp.case2");
5722       Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateOr(Cmp1, Cmp2, "switch.selectcmp");
5723       return Builder.CreateSelect(Cmp, ResultVector[0].first, DefaultResult);
5724     }
5725   }
5726 
5727   return nullptr;
5728 }
5729 
5730 // Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
5731 // a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
5732 static void removeSwitchAfterSelectFold(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
5733                                         Value *SelectValue,
5734                                         IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5735                                         DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
5736   std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
5737 
5738   BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
5739   BasicBlock *DestBB = PHI->getParent();
5740 
5741   if (DTU && !is_contained(predecessors(DestBB), SelectBB))
5742     Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, SelectBB, DestBB});
5743   Builder.CreateBr(DestBB);
5744 
5745   // Remove the switch.
5746 
5747   while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
5748     PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
5749   PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
5750 
5751   SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 4> RemovedSuccessors;
5752   for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
5753     BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
5754 
5755     if (Succ == DestBB)
5756       continue;
5757     Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
5758     if (DTU && RemovedSuccessors.insert(Succ).second)
5759       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, SelectBB, Succ});
5760   }
5761   SI->eraseFromParent();
5762   if (DTU)
5763     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
5764 }
5765 
5766 /// If a switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
5767 /// successor block with only two different constant values, try to replace the
5768 /// switch with a select. Returns true if the fold was made.
5769 static bool trySwitchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5770                               DomTreeUpdater *DTU, const DataLayout &DL,
5771                               const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
5772   Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
5773   PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
5774   BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
5775   Constant *DefaultResult;
5776   SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
5777   // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
5778   if (!initializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
5779                              DL, TTI, /*MaxUniqueResults*/ 2))
5780     return false;
5781 
5782   assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
5783   Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
5784   Value *SelectValue =
5785       foldSwitchToSelect(UniqueResults, DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
5786   if (!SelectValue)
5787     return false;
5788 
5789   removeSwitchAfterSelectFold(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder, DTU);
5790   return true;
5791 }
5792 
5793 namespace {
5794 
5795 /// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
5796 class SwitchLookupTable {
5797 public:
5798   /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
5799   /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
5800   SwitchLookupTable(
5801       Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
5802       const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
5803       Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL, const StringRef &FuncName);
5804 
5805   /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
5806   /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
5807   Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
5808 
5809   /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
5810   /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
5811   static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
5812                                  Type *ElementType);
5813 
5814 private:
5815   // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
5816   // different ways.
5817   enum {
5818     // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
5819     // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
5820     SingleValueKind,
5821 
5822     // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
5823     // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
5824     // and addition instead of a table lookup.
5825     LinearMapKind,
5826 
5827     // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
5828     // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
5829     // shift and mask operations.
5830     BitMapKind,
5831 
5832     // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
5833     // instructions from the table.
5834     ArrayKind
5835   } Kind;
5836 
5837   // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
5838   Constant *SingleValue = nullptr;
5839 
5840   // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
5841   ConstantInt *BitMap = nullptr;
5842   IntegerType *BitMapElementTy = nullptr;
5843 
5844   // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
5845   ConstantInt *LinearOffset = nullptr;
5846   ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier = nullptr;
5847 
5848   // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
5849   GlobalVariable *Array = nullptr;
5850 };
5851 
5852 } // end anonymous namespace
5853 
5854 SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
5855     Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
5856     const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
5857     Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL, const StringRef &FuncName) {
5858   assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
5859   assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
5860 
5861   // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
5862   SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
5863 
5864   Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
5865 
5866   // Build up the table contents.
5867   SmallVector<Constant *, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
5868   for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
5869     ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
5870     Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
5871     assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
5872 
5873     uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
5874     TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
5875 
5876     if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
5877       SingleValue = nullptr;
5878   }
5879 
5880   // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
5881   if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
5882     assert(DefaultValue &&
5883            "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
5884     assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
5885     for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
5886       if (!TableContents[I])
5887         TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
5888     }
5889 
5890     if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
5891       SingleValue = nullptr;
5892   }
5893 
5894   // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
5895   // that single value.
5896   if (SingleValue) {
5897     Kind = SingleValueKind;
5898     return;
5899   }
5900 
5901   // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
5902   // table index.
5903   if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
5904     bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
5905     APInt PrevVal;
5906     APInt DistToPrev;
5907     assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
5908     // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
5909     for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
5910       ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
5911       if (!ConstVal) {
5912         // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
5913         // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
5914         LinearMappingPossible = false;
5915         break;
5916       }
5917       const APInt &Val = ConstVal->getValue();
5918       if (I != 0) {
5919         APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
5920         if (I == 1) {
5921           DistToPrev = Dist;
5922         } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
5923           LinearMappingPossible = false;
5924           break;
5925         }
5926       }
5927       PrevVal = Val;
5928     }
5929     if (LinearMappingPossible) {
5930       LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
5931       LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
5932       Kind = LinearMapKind;
5933       ++NumLinearMaps;
5934       return;
5935     }
5936   }
5937 
5938   // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
5939   if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
5940     IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
5941     APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
5942     for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
5943       TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
5944       // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
5945       if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
5946         ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
5947         TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
5948       }
5949     }
5950     BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
5951     BitMapElementTy = IT;
5952     Kind = BitMapKind;
5953     ++NumBitMaps;
5954     return;
5955   }
5956 
5957   // Store the table in an array.
5958   ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
5959   Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
5960 
5961   Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*isConstant=*/true,
5962                              GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, Initializer,
5963                              "switch.table." + FuncName);
5964   Array->setUnnamedAddr(GlobalValue::UnnamedAddr::Global);
5965   // Set the alignment to that of an array items. We will be only loading one
5966   // value out of it.
5967   Array->setAlignment(Align(DL.getPrefTypeAlignment(ValueType)));
5968   Kind = ArrayKind;
5969 }
5970 
5971 Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
5972   switch (Kind) {
5973   case SingleValueKind:
5974     return SingleValue;
5975   case LinearMapKind: {
5976     // Derive the result value from the input value.
5977     Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
5978                                           false, "switch.idx.cast");
5979     if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
5980       Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
5981     if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
5982       Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
5983     return Result;
5984   }
5985   case BitMapKind: {
5986     // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
5987     IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
5988 
5989     // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
5990     // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
5991     // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
5992     Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
5993 
5994     // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
5995     ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(
5996         ShiftAmt, ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
5997         "switch.shiftamt");
5998 
5999     // Shift down.
6000     Value *DownShifted =
6001         Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, "switch.downshift");
6002     // Mask off.
6003     return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, "switch.masked");
6004   }
6005   case ArrayKind: {
6006     // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
6007     IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
6008     uint64_t TableSize =
6009         Array->getInitializer()->getType()->getArrayNumElements();
6010     if (TableSize > (1ULL << std::min(IT->getBitWidth() - 1, 63u)))
6011       Index = Builder.CreateZExt(
6012           Index, IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(), IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
6013           "switch.tableidx.zext");
6014 
6015     Value *GEPIndices[] = {Builder.getInt32(0), Index};
6016     Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
6017                                            GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
6018     return Builder.CreateLoad(
6019         cast<ArrayType>(Array->getValueType())->getElementType(), GEP,
6020         "switch.load");
6021   }
6022   }
6023   llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
6024 }
6025 
6026 bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
6027                                            uint64_t TableSize,
6028                                            Type *ElementType) {
6029   auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
6030   if (!IT)
6031     return false;
6032   // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
6033   // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
6034 
6035   // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
6036   if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX / IT->getBitWidth())
6037     return false;
6038   return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
6039 }
6040 
6041 static bool isTypeLegalForLookupTable(Type *Ty, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
6042                                       const DataLayout &DL) {
6043   // Allow any legal type.
6044   if (TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty))
6045     return true;
6046 
6047   auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(Ty);
6048   if (!IT)
6049     return false;
6050 
6051   // Also allow power of 2 integer types that have at least 8 bits and fit in
6052   // a register. These types are common in frontend languages and targets
6053   // usually support loads of these types.
6054   // TODO: We could relax this to any integer that fits in a register and rely
6055   // on ABI alignment and padding in the table to allow the load to be widened.
6056   // Or we could widen the constants and truncate the load.
6057   unsigned BitWidth = IT->getBitWidth();
6058   return BitWidth >= 8 && isPowerOf2_32(BitWidth) &&
6059          DL.fitsInLegalInteger(IT->getBitWidth());
6060 }
6061 
6062 static bool isSwitchDense(uint64_t NumCases, uint64_t CaseRange) {
6063   // 40% is the default density for building a jump table in optsize/minsize
6064   // mode. See also TargetLoweringBase::isSuitableForJumpTable(), which this
6065   // function was based on.
6066   const uint64_t MinDensity = 40;
6067 
6068   if (CaseRange >= UINT64_MAX / 100)
6069     return false; // Avoid multiplication overflows below.
6070 
6071   return NumCases * 100 >= CaseRange * MinDensity;
6072 }
6073 
6074 static bool isSwitchDense(ArrayRef<int64_t> Values) {
6075   uint64_t Diff = (uint64_t)Values.back() - (uint64_t)Values.front();
6076   uint64_t Range = Diff + 1;
6077   if (Range < Diff)
6078     return false; // Overflow.
6079 
6080   return isSwitchDense(Values.size(), Range);
6081 }
6082 
6083 /// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
6084 /// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
6085 // TODO: We could support larger than legal types by limiting based on the
6086 // number of loads required and/or table size. If the constants are small we
6087 // could use smaller table entries and extend after the load.
6088 static bool
6089 ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
6090                        const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
6091                        const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
6092   if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize)
6093     return false; // TableSize overflowed.
6094 
6095   bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
6096   bool HasIllegalType = false;
6097   for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
6098     Type *Ty = I.second;
6099 
6100     // Saturate this flag to true.
6101     HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !isTypeLegalForLookupTable(Ty, TTI, DL);
6102 
6103     // Saturate this flag to false.
6104     AllTablesFitInRegister =
6105         AllTablesFitInRegister &&
6106         SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
6107 
6108     // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
6109     // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
6110     // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
6111     if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
6112       break;
6113   }
6114 
6115   // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
6116   if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
6117     return true;
6118 
6119   // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
6120   if (HasIllegalType)
6121     return false;
6122 
6123   return isSwitchDense(SI->getNumCases(), TableSize);
6124 }
6125 
6126 /// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
6127 /// \code
6128 ///     if (idx < tablesize)
6129 ///        r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
6130 ///     else
6131 ///        r = default_value;
6132 ///     if (r != default_value)
6133 ///        ...
6134 /// \endcode
6135 /// Is optimized to:
6136 /// \code
6137 ///     cond = idx < tablesize;
6138 ///     if (cond)
6139 ///        r = table[idx];
6140 ///     else
6141 ///        r = default_value;
6142 ///     if (cond)
6143 ///        ...
6144 /// \endcode
6145 /// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
6146 static void reuseTableCompare(
6147     User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock, BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch,
6148     Constant *DefaultValue,
6149     const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values) {
6150   ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
6151   if (!CmpInst)
6152     return;
6153 
6154   // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
6155   // threading can do its work afterwards.
6156   if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
6157     return;
6158 
6159   Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
6160   if (!CmpOp1)
6161     return;
6162 
6163   Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
6164   Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
6165   Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
6166 
6167   // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
6168   Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
6169                                                  DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
6170   if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
6171     return;
6172 
6173   // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
6174   // compare result.
6175   for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
6176     Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
6177                                                 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
6178     if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst ||
6179         (CaseConst != TrueConst && CaseConst != FalseConst))
6180       return;
6181   }
6182 
6183   // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
6184   // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
6185   // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
6186   // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
6187   BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
6188   for (BasicBlock *Pred : predecessors(PhiBlock)) {
6189     if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
6190       return;
6191   }
6192 
6193   if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
6194     // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
6195     CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
6196     ++NumTableCmpReuses;
6197   } else {
6198     // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
6199     Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(
6200         RangeCmp, ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
6201         RangeCheckBranch);
6202     CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
6203     ++NumTableCmpReuses;
6204   }
6205 }
6206 
6207 /// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
6208 /// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
6209 /// lookup tables.
6210 static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
6211                                 DomTreeUpdater *DTU, const DataLayout &DL,
6212                                 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
6213   assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
6214 
6215   BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
6216   Function *Fn = BB->getParent();
6217   // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it or the
6218   // attribute is not set.
6219   if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables() ||
6220       (Fn->getFnAttribute("no-jump-tables").getValueAsBool()))
6221     return false;
6222 
6223   // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
6224   // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
6225 
6226   // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
6227   // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
6228   // string and lookup indices into that.
6229 
6230   // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make
6231   // them faster, so we don't analyze them.
6232   if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
6233     return false;
6234 
6235   // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
6236   // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
6237   assert(!SI->cases().empty());
6238   SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
6239   ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
6240   ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
6241 
6242   BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
6243 
6244   using ResultListTy = SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>, 4>;
6245   SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
6246 
6247   SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Constant *> DefaultResults;
6248   SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> ResultTypes;
6249   SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
6250 
6251   for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
6252     ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
6253     if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
6254       MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
6255     if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
6256       MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
6257 
6258     // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
6259     using ResultsTy = SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4>;
6260     ResultsTy Results;
6261     if (!getCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI->getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
6262                         Results, DL, TTI))
6263       return false;
6264 
6265     // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
6266     for (const auto &I : Results) {
6267       PHINode *PHI = I.first;
6268       Constant *Value = I.second;
6269       if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
6270         PHIs.push_back(PHI);
6271       ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
6272     }
6273   }
6274 
6275   // Keep track of the result types.
6276   for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
6277     ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
6278   }
6279 
6280   uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
6281   APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
6282   uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
6283   bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
6284 
6285   // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
6286   // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
6287   SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
6288   bool HasDefaultResults =
6289       getCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest,
6290                      DefaultResultsList, DL, TTI);
6291 
6292   bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
6293   if (NeedMask) {
6294     // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
6295     if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
6296       return false;
6297     if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
6298       return false;
6299   }
6300 
6301   for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
6302     PHINode *PHI = I.first;
6303     Constant *Result = I.second;
6304     DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
6305   }
6306 
6307   if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
6308     return false;
6309 
6310   std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
6311 
6312   // Create the BB that does the lookups.
6313   Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
6314   BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(
6315       Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup", CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
6316 
6317   // Compute the table index value.
6318   Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
6319   Value *TableIndex;
6320   if (MinCaseVal->isNullValue())
6321     TableIndex = SI->getCondition();
6322   else
6323     TableIndex = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal,
6324                                    "switch.tableidx");
6325 
6326   // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
6327   // switching upon.
6328   unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
6329   uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
6330   assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
6331          "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
6332          "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
6333 
6334   // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
6335   // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
6336   // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
6337   const bool DefaultIsReachable =
6338       !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
6339   const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
6340   BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
6341 
6342   if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
6343     Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
6344     if (DTU)
6345       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, BB, LookupBB});
6346     // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
6347     // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
6348   } else {
6349     Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(
6350         TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
6351     RangeCheckBranch =
6352         Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
6353     if (DTU)
6354       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, BB, LookupBB});
6355   }
6356 
6357   // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
6358   Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
6359 
6360   if (NeedMask) {
6361     // Before doing the lookup, we do the hole check. The LookupBB is therefore
6362     // re-purposed to do the hole check, and we create a new LookupBB.
6363     BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
6364     MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
6365     LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup",
6366                                   CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
6367 
6368     // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8-bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
6369     // unnecessary illegal types.
6370     uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
6371     APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
6372     APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
6373     // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
6374     const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
6375     for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
6376       uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue())
6377                          .getLimitedValue();
6378       MaskInt |= One << Idx;
6379     }
6380     ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
6381 
6382     // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
6383     // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
6384     // else continue with table lookup.
6385     IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
6386     Value *MaskIndex =
6387         Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy, "switch.maskindex");
6388     Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex, "switch.shifted");
6389     Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(
6390         Shifted, Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()), "switch.lobit");
6391     Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
6392     if (DTU) {
6393       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, MaskBB, LookupBB});
6394       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, MaskBB, SI->getDefaultDest()});
6395     }
6396     Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
6397     AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, BB);
6398   }
6399 
6400   if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
6401     // We cached PHINodes in PHIs. To avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
6402     // do not delete PHINodes here.
6403     SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(BB,
6404                                             /*KeepOneInputPHIs=*/true);
6405     if (DTU)
6406       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, SI->getDefaultDest()});
6407   }
6408 
6409   for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
6410     const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
6411 
6412     // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
6413     Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
6414     StringRef FuncName = Fn->getName();
6415     SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL,
6416                             FuncName);
6417 
6418     Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
6419 
6420     // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
6421     // possible.
6422     if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
6423       BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
6424       // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
6425       for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
6426         reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
6427       }
6428     }
6429 
6430     PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
6431   }
6432 
6433   Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
6434   if (DTU)
6435     Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, LookupBB, CommonDest});
6436 
6437   // Remove the switch.
6438   SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 8> RemovedSuccessors;
6439   for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
6440     BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
6441 
6442     if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
6443       continue;
6444     Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
6445     if (DTU && RemovedSuccessors.insert(Succ).second)
6446       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, Succ});
6447   }
6448   SI->eraseFromParent();
6449 
6450   if (DTU)
6451     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
6452 
6453   ++NumLookupTables;
6454   if (NeedMask)
6455     ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
6456   return true;
6457 }
6458 
6459 /// Try to transform a switch that has "holes" in it to a contiguous sequence
6460 /// of cases.
6461 ///
6462 /// A switch such as: switch(i) {case 5: case 9: case 13: case 17:} can be
6463 /// range-reduced to: switch ((i-5) / 4) {case 0: case 1: case 2: case 3:}.
6464 ///
6465 /// This converts a sparse switch into a dense switch which allows better
6466 /// lowering and could also allow transforming into a lookup table.
6467 static bool ReduceSwitchRange(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
6468                               const DataLayout &DL,
6469                               const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
6470   auto *CondTy = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
6471   if (CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth() > 64 ||
6472       !DL.fitsInLegalInteger(CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth()))
6473     return false;
6474   // Only bother with this optimization if there are more than 3 switch cases;
6475   // SDAG will only bother creating jump tables for 4 or more cases.
6476   if (SI->getNumCases() < 4)
6477     return false;
6478 
6479   // This transform is agnostic to the signedness of the input or case values. We
6480   // can treat the case values as signed or unsigned. We can optimize more common
6481   // cases such as a sequence crossing zero {-4,0,4,8} if we interpret case values
6482   // as signed.
6483   SmallVector<int64_t,4> Values;
6484   for (auto &C : SI->cases())
6485     Values.push_back(C.getCaseValue()->getValue().getSExtValue());
6486   llvm::sort(Values);
6487 
6488   // If the switch is already dense, there's nothing useful to do here.
6489   if (isSwitchDense(Values))
6490     return false;
6491 
6492   // First, transform the values such that they start at zero and ascend.
6493   int64_t Base = Values[0];
6494   for (auto &V : Values)
6495     V -= (uint64_t)(Base);
6496 
6497   // Now we have signed numbers that have been shifted so that, given enough
6498   // precision, there are no negative values. Since the rest of the transform
6499   // is bitwise only, we switch now to an unsigned representation.
6500 
6501   // This transform can be done speculatively because it is so cheap - it
6502   // results in a single rotate operation being inserted.
6503   // FIXME: It's possible that optimizing a switch on powers of two might also
6504   // be beneficial - flag values are often powers of two and we could use a CLZ
6505   // as the key function.
6506 
6507   // countTrailingZeros(0) returns 64. As Values is guaranteed to have more than
6508   // one element and LLVM disallows duplicate cases, Shift is guaranteed to be
6509   // less than 64.
6510   unsigned Shift = 64;
6511   for (auto &V : Values)
6512     Shift = std::min(Shift, countTrailingZeros((uint64_t)V));
6513   assert(Shift < 64);
6514   if (Shift > 0)
6515     for (auto &V : Values)
6516       V = (int64_t)((uint64_t)V >> Shift);
6517 
6518   if (!isSwitchDense(Values))
6519     // Transform didn't create a dense switch.
6520     return false;
6521 
6522   // The obvious transform is to shift the switch condition right and emit a
6523   // check that the condition actually cleanly divided by GCD, i.e.
6524   //   C & (1 << Shift - 1) == 0
6525   // inserting a new CFG edge to handle the case where it didn't divide cleanly.
6526   //
6527   // A cheaper way of doing this is a simple ROTR(C, Shift). This performs the
6528   // shift and puts the shifted-off bits in the uppermost bits. If any of these
6529   // are nonzero then the switch condition will be very large and will hit the
6530   // default case.
6531 
6532   auto *Ty = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
6533   Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
6534   auto *ShiftC = ConstantInt::get(Ty, Shift);
6535   auto *Sub = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), ConstantInt::get(Ty, Base));
6536   auto *LShr = Builder.CreateLShr(Sub, ShiftC);
6537   auto *Shl = Builder.CreateShl(Sub, Ty->getBitWidth() - Shift);
6538   auto *Rot = Builder.CreateOr(LShr, Shl);
6539   SI->replaceUsesOfWith(SI->getCondition(), Rot);
6540 
6541   for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
6542     auto *Orig = Case.getCaseValue();
6543     auto Sub = Orig->getValue() - APInt(Ty->getBitWidth(), Base);
6544     Case.setValue(
6545         cast<ConstantInt>(ConstantInt::get(Ty, Sub.lshr(ShiftC->getValue()))));
6546   }
6547   return true;
6548 }
6549 
6550 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
6551   BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
6552 
6553   if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
6554     // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
6555     // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
6556     if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
6557       if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
6558         return requestResimplify();
6559 
6560     Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
6561     if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
6562       if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
6563         return requestResimplify();
6564 
6565     // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
6566     // away into any preds.
6567     if (SI == &*BB->instructionsWithoutDebug(false).begin())
6568       if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
6569         return requestResimplify();
6570   }
6571 
6572   // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
6573   // The conversion from switch to comparison may lose information on
6574   // impossible switch values, so disable it early in the pipeline.
6575   if (Options.ConvertSwitchRangeToICmp && TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
6576     return requestResimplify();
6577 
6578   // Remove unreachable cases.
6579   if (eliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, DTU, Options.AC, DL))
6580     return requestResimplify();
6581 
6582   if (trySwitchToSelect(SI, Builder, DTU, DL, TTI))
6583     return requestResimplify();
6584 
6585   if (Options.ForwardSwitchCondToPhi && ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
6586     return requestResimplify();
6587 
6588   // The conversion from switch to lookup tables results in difficult-to-analyze
6589   // code and makes pruning branches much harder. This is a problem if the
6590   // switch expression itself can still be restricted as a result of inlining or
6591   // CVP. Therefore, only apply this transformation during late stages of the
6592   // optimisation pipeline.
6593   if (Options.ConvertSwitchToLookupTable &&
6594       SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DTU, DL, TTI))
6595     return requestResimplify();
6596 
6597   if (ReduceSwitchRange(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
6598     return requestResimplify();
6599 
6600   return false;
6601 }
6602 
6603 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
6604   BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
6605   bool Changed = false;
6606 
6607   // Eliminate redundant destinations.
6608   SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
6609   SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 8> RemovedSuccs;
6610   for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
6611     BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
6612     if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
6613       if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken())
6614         RemovedSuccs.insert(Dest);
6615       Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
6616       IBI->removeDestination(i);
6617       --i;
6618       --e;
6619       Changed = true;
6620     }
6621   }
6622 
6623   if (DTU) {
6624     std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
6625     Updates.reserve(RemovedSuccs.size());
6626     for (auto *RemovedSucc : RemovedSuccs)
6627       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, RemovedSucc});
6628     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
6629   }
6630 
6631   if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
6632     // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
6633     new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
6634     EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(IBI);
6635     return true;
6636   }
6637 
6638   if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
6639     // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
6640     BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
6641     EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(IBI);
6642     return true;
6643   }
6644 
6645   if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
6646     if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
6647       return requestResimplify();
6648   }
6649   return Changed;
6650 }
6651 
6652 /// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
6653 /// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with.  This
6654 /// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
6655 /// a shared handler.
6656 ///
6657 /// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
6658 /// here.  That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere.  In
6659 /// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
6660 /// when dealing with exception dense code.  (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
6661 /// sinking in this file)
6662 ///
6663 /// This is primarily a code size optimization.  We need to avoid performing
6664 /// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
6665 /// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning).  We do this by not
6666 /// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi.  Since the same
6667 /// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't lose any ability to
6668 /// specialize.  If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
6669 ///
6670 /// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
6671 /// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
6672 /// merged.  In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
6673 static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
6674                                  BasicBlock *BB, DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
6675   auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
6676   assert(Succ);
6677   // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
6678   // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
6679   if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
6680     return false;
6681 
6682   for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
6683     if (BB == OtherPred)
6684       continue;
6685     BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
6686     LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
6687     if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
6688       continue;
6689     for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
6690       ;
6691     BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
6692     if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
6693       continue;
6694 
6695     std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
6696 
6697     // We've found an identical block.  Update our predecessors to take that
6698     // path instead and make ourselves dead.
6699     SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 16> UniquePreds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
6700     for (BasicBlock *Pred : UniquePreds) {
6701       InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
6702       assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB && II->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
6703              "unexpected successor");
6704       II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
6705       if (DTU) {
6706         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, Pred, OtherPred});
6707         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, Pred, BB});
6708       }
6709     }
6710 
6711     // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
6712     // used to go through BB.  We need to delete it or update it.
6713     for (Instruction &Inst : llvm::make_early_inc_range(*OtherPred))
6714       if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
6715         Inst.eraseFromParent();
6716 
6717     SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 16> UniqueSuccs(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
6718     for (BasicBlock *Succ : UniqueSuccs) {
6719       Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
6720       if (DTU)
6721         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, Succ});
6722     }
6723 
6724     IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
6725     Builder.CreateUnreachable();
6726     BI->eraseFromParent();
6727     if (DTU)
6728       DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
6729     return true;
6730   }
6731   return false;
6732 }
6733 
6734 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyBranch(BranchInst *Branch, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
6735   return Branch->isUnconditional() ? simplifyUncondBranch(Branch, Builder)
6736                                    : simplifyCondBranch(Branch, Builder);
6737 }
6738 
6739 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI,
6740                                           IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
6741   BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
6742   BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(0);
6743 
6744   // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
6745   // If LoopHeader is provided, check if the block or its successor is a loop
6746   // header. (This is for early invocations before loop simplify and
6747   // vectorization to keep canonical loop forms for nested loops. These blocks
6748   // can be eliminated when the pass is invoked later in the back-end.)
6749   // Note that if BB has only one predecessor then we do not introduce new
6750   // backedge, so we can eliminate BB.
6751   bool NeedCanonicalLoop =
6752       Options.NeedCanonicalLoop &&
6753       (!LoopHeaders.empty() && BB->hasNPredecessorsOrMore(2) &&
6754        (is_contained(LoopHeaders, BB) || is_contained(LoopHeaders, Succ)));
6755   BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg(true)->getIterator();
6756   if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
6757       !NeedCanonicalLoop && TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB, DTU))
6758     return true;
6759 
6760   // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison against a
6761   // constant, try to simplify the block.
6762   if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
6763     if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
6764       for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
6765         ;
6766       if (I->isTerminator() &&
6767           tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder))
6768         return true;
6769     }
6770 
6771   // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
6772   // equivalent.
6773   if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
6774     for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
6775       ;
6776     if (I->isTerminator() && TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB, DTU))
6777       return true;
6778   }
6779 
6780   // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
6781   // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
6782   // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
6783   // for PHI nodes in common successor.
6784   if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, DTU, /*MSSAU=*/nullptr, &TTI,
6785                              Options.BonusInstThreshold))
6786     return requestResimplify();
6787   return false;
6788 }
6789 
6790 static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
6791   BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
6792   for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
6793     BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
6794     if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
6795       return nullptr;
6796     PredPred = PPred;
6797   }
6798   return PredPred;
6799 }
6800 
6801 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
6802   assert(
6803       !isa<ConstantInt>(BI->getCondition()) &&
6804       BI->getSuccessor(0) != BI->getSuccessor(1) &&
6805       "Tautological conditional branch should have been eliminated already.");
6806 
6807   BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
6808   if (!Options.SimplifyCondBranch)
6809     return false;
6810 
6811   // Conditional branch
6812   if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
6813     // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
6814     // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
6815     // switch.
6816     if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
6817       if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
6818         return requestResimplify();
6819 
6820     // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
6821     // Ignore dbg and pseudo intrinsics.
6822     auto I = BB->instructionsWithoutDebug(true).begin();
6823     if (&*I == BI) {
6824       if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
6825         return requestResimplify();
6826     } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())) {
6827       ++I;
6828       if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
6829         return requestResimplify();
6830     }
6831   }
6832 
6833   // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
6834   if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
6835     return true;
6836 
6837   // If this basic block has dominating predecessor blocks and the dominating
6838   // blocks' conditions imply BI's condition, we know the direction of BI.
6839   Optional<bool> Imp = isImpliedByDomCondition(BI->getCondition(), BI, DL);
6840   if (Imp) {
6841     // Turn this into a branch on constant.
6842     auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
6843     ConstantInt *TorF = *Imp ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext())
6844                              : ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
6845     BI->setCondition(TorF);
6846     RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
6847     return requestResimplify();
6848   }
6849 
6850   // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
6851   // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
6852   // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
6853   if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, DTU, /*MSSAU=*/nullptr, &TTI,
6854                              Options.BonusInstThreshold))
6855     return requestResimplify();
6856 
6857   // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
6858   // from BI.  We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
6859   // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks.  If so, we
6860   // can hoist it up to the branching block.
6861   if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
6862     if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
6863       if (HoistCommon &&
6864           HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI, !Options.HoistCommonInsts))
6865         return requestResimplify();
6866     } else {
6867       // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
6868       // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
6869       Instruction *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
6870       if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
6871           Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
6872         if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
6873           return requestResimplify();
6874     }
6875   } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
6876     // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
6877     // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
6878     Instruction *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
6879     if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
6880         Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
6881       if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
6882         return requestResimplify();
6883   }
6884 
6885   // If this is a branch on something for which we know the constant value in
6886   // predecessors (e.g. a phi node in the current block), thread control
6887   // through this block.
6888   if (FoldCondBranchOnValueKnownInPredecessor(BI, DTU, DL, Options.AC))
6889     return requestResimplify();
6890 
6891   // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
6892   for (BasicBlock *Pred : predecessors(BB))
6893     if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
6894       if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
6895         if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DTU, DL, TTI))
6896           return requestResimplify();
6897 
6898   // Look for diamond patterns.
6899   if (MergeCondStores)
6900     if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
6901       if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
6902         if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
6903           if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI, DTU, DL, TTI))
6904             return requestResimplify();
6905 
6906   return false;
6907 }
6908 
6909 /// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
6910 static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I, bool PtrValueMayBeModified) {
6911   Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
6912   if (!C)
6913     return false;
6914 
6915   if (I->use_empty())
6916     return false;
6917 
6918   if (C->isNullValue() || isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
6919     // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
6920     auto *Use = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
6921     // Bail out if Use is not in the same BB as I or Use == I or Use comes
6922     // before I in the block. The latter two can be the case if Use is a PHI
6923     // node.
6924     if (Use->getParent() != I->getParent() || Use == I || Use->comesBefore(I))
6925       return false;
6926 
6927     // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
6928     // control flow (eg. calls)
6929     auto InstrRange =
6930         make_range(std::next(I->getIterator()), Use->getIterator());
6931     if (any_of(InstrRange, [](Instruction &I) {
6932           return !isGuaranteedToTransferExecutionToSuccessor(&I);
6933         }))
6934       return false;
6935 
6936     // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
6937     if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
6938       if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I) {
6939         if (!GEP->isInBounds() || !GEP->hasAllZeroIndices())
6940           PtrValueMayBeModified = true;
6941         return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP, PtrValueMayBeModified);
6942       }
6943 
6944     // Look through bitcasts.
6945     if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
6946       return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC, PtrValueMayBeModified);
6947 
6948     // Load from null is undefined.
6949     if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
6950       if (!LI->isVolatile())
6951         return !NullPointerIsDefined(LI->getFunction(),
6952                                      LI->getPointerAddressSpace());
6953 
6954     // Store to null is undefined.
6955     if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
6956       if (!SI->isVolatile())
6957         return (!NullPointerIsDefined(SI->getFunction(),
6958                                       SI->getPointerAddressSpace())) &&
6959                SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
6960 
6961     if (auto *CB = dyn_cast<CallBase>(Use)) {
6962       if (C->isNullValue() && NullPointerIsDefined(CB->getFunction()))
6963         return false;
6964       // A call to null is undefined.
6965       if (CB->getCalledOperand() == I)
6966         return true;
6967 
6968       if (C->isNullValue()) {
6969         for (const llvm::Use &Arg : CB->args())
6970           if (Arg == I) {
6971             unsigned ArgIdx = CB->getArgOperandNo(&Arg);
6972             if (CB->isPassingUndefUB(ArgIdx) &&
6973                 CB->paramHasAttr(ArgIdx, Attribute::NonNull)) {
6974               // Passing null to a nonnnull+noundef argument is undefined.
6975               return !PtrValueMayBeModified;
6976             }
6977           }
6978       } else if (isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
6979         // Passing undef to a noundef argument is undefined.
6980         for (const llvm::Use &Arg : CB->args())
6981           if (Arg == I) {
6982             unsigned ArgIdx = CB->getArgOperandNo(&Arg);
6983             if (CB->isPassingUndefUB(ArgIdx)) {
6984               // Passing undef to a noundef argument is undefined.
6985               return true;
6986             }
6987           }
6988       }
6989     }
6990   }
6991   return false;
6992 }
6993 
6994 /// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
6995 /// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
6996 static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB,
6997                                               DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
6998   for (PHINode &PHI : BB->phis())
6999     for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI.getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
7000       if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI.getIncomingValue(i), &PHI)) {
7001         BasicBlock *Predecessor = PHI.getIncomingBlock(i);
7002         Instruction *T = Predecessor->getTerminator();
7003         IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
7004         if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
7005           BB->removePredecessor(Predecessor);
7006           // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
7007           // destination from conditional branches.
7008           if (BI->isUnconditional())
7009             Builder.CreateUnreachable();
7010           else {
7011             // Preserve guarding condition in assume, because it might not be
7012             // inferrable from any dominating condition.
7013             Value *Cond = BI->getCondition();
7014             if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB)
7015               Builder.CreateAssumption(Builder.CreateNot(Cond));
7016             else
7017               Builder.CreateAssumption(Cond);
7018             Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1)
7019                                                        : BI->getSuccessor(0));
7020           }
7021           BI->eraseFromParent();
7022           if (DTU)
7023             DTU->applyUpdates({{DominatorTree::Delete, Predecessor, BB}});
7024           return true;
7025         } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(T)) {
7026           // Redirect all branches leading to UB into
7027           // a newly created unreachable block.
7028           BasicBlock *Unreachable = BasicBlock::Create(
7029               Predecessor->getContext(), "unreachable", BB->getParent(), BB);
7030           Builder.SetInsertPoint(Unreachable);
7031           // The new block contains only one instruction: Unreachable
7032           Builder.CreateUnreachable();
7033           for (auto &Case : SI->cases())
7034             if (Case.getCaseSuccessor() == BB) {
7035               BB->removePredecessor(Predecessor);
7036               Case.setSuccessor(Unreachable);
7037             }
7038           if (SI->getDefaultDest() == BB) {
7039             BB->removePredecessor(Predecessor);
7040             SI->setDefaultDest(Unreachable);
7041           }
7042 
7043           if (DTU)
7044             DTU->applyUpdates(
7045                 { { DominatorTree::Insert, Predecessor, Unreachable },
7046                   { DominatorTree::Delete, Predecessor, BB } });
7047           return true;
7048         }
7049       }
7050 
7051   return false;
7052 }
7053 
7054 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyOnce(BasicBlock *BB) {
7055   bool Changed = false;
7056 
7057   assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
7058   assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
7059 
7060   // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
7061   // or that just have themself as a predecessor.  These are unreachable.
7062   if ((pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
7063       BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
7064     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
7065     DeleteDeadBlock(BB, DTU);
7066     return true;
7067   }
7068 
7069   // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
7070   // away...
7071   Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, /*DeleteDeadConditions=*/true,
7072                                     /*TLI=*/nullptr, DTU);
7073 
7074   // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
7075   Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
7076 
7077   // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
7078   if (removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB, DTU))
7079     return requestResimplify();
7080 
7081   // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
7082   // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
7083   // if there are no PHI nodes.
7084   if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB, DTU))
7085     return true;
7086 
7087   if (SinkCommon && Options.SinkCommonInsts)
7088     if (SinkCommonCodeFromPredecessors(BB, DTU) ||
7089         MergeCompatibleInvokes(BB, DTU)) {
7090       // SinkCommonCodeFromPredecessors() does not automatically CSE PHI's,
7091       // so we may now how duplicate PHI's.
7092       // Let's rerun EliminateDuplicatePHINodes() first,
7093       // before FoldTwoEntryPHINode() potentially converts them into select's,
7094       // after which we'd need a whole EarlyCSE pass run to cleanup them.
7095       return true;
7096     }
7097 
7098   IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
7099 
7100   if (Options.FoldTwoEntryPHINode) {
7101     // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
7102     // eliminate it, do so now.
7103     if (auto *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
7104       if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
7105         if (FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DTU, DL))
7106           return true;
7107   }
7108 
7109   Instruction *Terminator = BB->getTerminator();
7110   Builder.SetInsertPoint(Terminator);
7111   switch (Terminator->getOpcode()) {
7112   case Instruction::Br:
7113     Changed |= simplifyBranch(cast<BranchInst>(Terminator), Builder);
7114     break;
7115   case Instruction::Resume:
7116     Changed |= simplifyResume(cast<ResumeInst>(Terminator), Builder);
7117     break;
7118   case Instruction::CleanupRet:
7119     Changed |= simplifyCleanupReturn(cast<CleanupReturnInst>(Terminator));
7120     break;
7121   case Instruction::Switch:
7122     Changed |= simplifySwitch(cast<SwitchInst>(Terminator), Builder);
7123     break;
7124   case Instruction::Unreachable:
7125     Changed |= simplifyUnreachable(cast<UnreachableInst>(Terminator));
7126     break;
7127   case Instruction::IndirectBr:
7128     Changed |= simplifyIndirectBr(cast<IndirectBrInst>(Terminator));
7129     break;
7130   }
7131 
7132   return Changed;
7133 }
7134 
7135 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
7136   bool Changed = false;
7137 
7138   // Repeated simplify BB as long as resimplification is requested.
7139   do {
7140     Resimplify = false;
7141 
7142     // Perform one round of simplifcation. Resimplify flag will be set if
7143     // another iteration is requested.
7144     Changed |= simplifyOnce(BB);
7145   } while (Resimplify);
7146 
7147   return Changed;
7148 }
7149 
7150 bool llvm::simplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
7151                        DomTreeUpdater *DTU, const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options,
7152                        ArrayRef<WeakVH> LoopHeaders) {
7153   return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, DTU, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(), LoopHeaders,
7154                         Options)
7155       .run(BB);
7156 }
7157